Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

which they have taken in with

  • 1 συγκαταλαμβάνω

    A seize, take possession of together, X.Cyr.4.2.42; occupy at the same time, in a military sense,

    τὸ χωρίον Th.7.26

    ;

    τὴν πόλιν Isoc.19.19

    .
    2 comprehend together with, τινι D.L.9.97 ([voice] Pass.).
    ------------------------------------
    2 appoint in addition,

    πολλοὺς [πρεσβευτὰς] τῶν ἀνεπιτηδείως ἐχόντων Plu.2.819a

    ;

    ταῖς ἐντιμοτάταις ἀρχαῖς σ. παρασίτους Clearch.1

    .
    3 include in or add to a list or catalogue, Str.8.4.1, 13.3.1 ([voice] Act. and [voice] Pass.), Gal.15.454: c. gen.,

    τοῦδε ἢ τοῦδε τοῦ κλίματος -λεχθέντα Str.11.12.1

    ;

    τινάς τισι Apollod.3.6.3

    , cf. J.AJ2.7.4 ([voice] Pass.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > συγκαταλαμβάνω

  • 2 οἰκονομία

    οἰκονομία, ας, ἡ (οἰκονομέω; X., Pla.+; ins., pap; Is 22:19, 21; TestJob, ParJer, Philo, Joseph.)
    ① responsibility of management, management of a household, direction, office (X., Oec. 1, 1; Herodian 6, 1, 1; Jos., Ant. 2, 89; PTebt 27, 21 [114 B.C.]; PLond III, 904, 25 p. 125 [104 A.D.]; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 57, 22).
    ⓐ lit., of the work of an οἰκονόμος ‘estate manager’ Lk 16:2–4 (this passage shows that it is not always poss. to draw a sharp distinction betw. the office itself and the activities associated w. it).—WPöhlmann, Der verlorene Sohn u. das Haus ’93.
    ⓑ Paul applies the idea of administration to the office of an apostle οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι I have been entrusted with a commission/task 1 Cor 9:17 (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 11 [p. 82, 8]); ἀνθρωπίνων οἰκονομίαν μυστηρίων πεπίστευνται they have been entrusted with the administration of merely human mysteries Dg 7:1. Of a supervisor (bishop): ὸ̔ν πέμπει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης εἰς ἰδίαν οἰκ. (οἰκ. ἰδίου οἴκου) the one whom the master of the house sent to administer his own household IEph 6:1. This is prob. also the place for κατὰ τὴν οἰκ. τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς according to the divine office which has been granted to me for you Col 1:25, as well as ἠκούσατε τὴν οἰκονομίαν τ. χάριτος τ. θεοῦ τῆς δοθείσης μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς you have heard of the administration of God’s grace that was granted to me for you Eph 3:2 (on the other hand, this latter vs. may be parallel to the usage in vs. 9; s. 2b below).
    ② state of being arranged, arrangement, order, plan (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 25; Polyb. 4, 67, 9; 10, 16, 2; Diod S 1, 81, 3)
    ⓐ ἡ τῆς σαρκὸς οἰκονομία of the arrangement or structure of the parts of the body beneath the skin; they are laid bare by scourging MPol 2:2.—(Iren. 5, 3, 2 [Harv. II, 326, 3]).
    ⓑ of God’s unique plan private plan, plan of salvation, i.e. arrangements for redemption of humans (in the pap of arrangements and directions of authorities: UPZ 162 IX, 2 [117 B.C.]; CPR 11, 26, and in PGM [e.g. 4, 293] of the measures by which one wishes to attain some goal by extrahuman help.—Just., D. 31, 1 τοῦ πάθους … οἰκ.; Hippol., Did.) ἡ οἰκ. τοῦ μυστηρίου the plan of the mystery Eph 3:9 (v.l. κοινωνία; on the thought cp. vs. 2 and s. JReumann, NovT 3, ’59, 282–92.—Just., D. 134, 2 οἰκονομίαι … μυστηρίων). Also in the linguistically difficult passage 1:10 οἰκ. certainly refers to the plan of salvation which God is bringing to reality through Christ, in the fullness of the times. κατʼ οἰκονομίαν θεοῦ according to God’s plan of redemption IEph 18:2 (cp. Ath. 21, 4 κατὰ θείαν οἰκ.—Pl.: Iren. 1, 10, 1 [Harv. I 90, 8]) προσδηλώσω ὑμῖν ἧς ἠρξάμην οἰκονομίας εἰς τὸν καινὸν ἄνθρωπον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν I will explain to you further the divine plan which I began (to discuss), with reference to the new human being Jesus Christ IEph 20:1. AcPl Ha 3, 23 of God’s marvelous plan = way of doing things; 6, 26 ο̣ἰ̣κο̣ν̣[ομίαν πληρῶσω κτλ.] (so that I might carry out God’s) plan for me; pl. 5, 27 [ὡς καὶ ἐκεῖ τὰς τοῦ κυρίου οἰκο]νομίας πληρῶσε (=πληρῶσαι) [Paul has gone off to carry out God’s] purpose [also there] (in Macedonia) (apparently a ref. to the various missionary assignments given by God to Paul; for the formulation cp. τὴν οἰκ. τελέσας Orig., C. Cels. 2, 65, 4).
    ⓒ also of God’s arrangements in nature pl. αἱ οἰκ. θεοῦ Dg 4:5 (cp. Tat. 12, 2; 18, 2 ὕλης οἰκ.; Did., Gen. 92, 6 πάντα ὑπὸ τὴν αὐτοῦ οἰκ. ἐστίν.—Of the order in creation Theoph. Ant. 2, 12 [p. 130, 2]).
    ③ program of instruction, training (in the way of salvation); this mng. (found also Clem. Alex., Paed. 1, 8, 69, 3; 70, 1 p. 130 St.) seems to fit best in 1 Ti 1:4, where it is said of the erroneous teachings of certain persons ἐκζητήσεις παρέχουσιν μᾶλλον ἢ οἰκονομίαν θεοῦ τὴν ἐν πίστει they promote useless speculations rather than divine training that is in faith (οἰκοδομήν and οἰκοδομίαν [q.v.] as vv.ll. are simply ‘corrections’ to alleviate the difficulty). If οἰκ. is to be taken in the sense of 1b above, the thought of the verse would be somewhat as follows: ‘endless speculative inquiry merely brings about contention instead of the realization of God’s purpose which has to do with faith.’—OLillger, Das patristische Wort, diss. Erlangen ’55; JReumann, The Use of ΟΙΚΟΝΟΜΙΑ and Related Terms etc., diss. U. of Pennsylvania ’57.—DELG s.v. νέμω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οἰκονομία

  • 3 τυγχάνω

    τυγχάνω, Thgn.253, Pi.P.3.104, O.2.47, etc.: [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.
    A

    τύγχανον Od.14.231

    , ([etym.] παρετ-) Il.11.74: [tense] fut.

    τεύξομαι 16.609

    , Od.19.314, Ar.Eq. 112, Lys.18.23 (also as [tense] fut. [voice] Med. of τεύχω): [tense] aor. 2 ἔτῠχον, [dialect] Ep. τύχον, Il.5.287, 587, etc.; [dialect] Ep. subj. τύχωμι, -ῃσι, 7.243, 11.116; later also τετύχῃσι, Max.577; late [dialect] Ep. opt.

    τετύχοιμι Man.3.299

    : [dialect] Ep. also [tense] aor. 1

    ἐτύχησα Il.15.581

    , al., Hes.Fr.15: [tense] pf. τετύχηκα (intr.) Od.10.88 (part. τετυχηκώς, v.l. τετυχηώς. Il.17.748), Th. 1.32, (trans.) X.Cyr.4.1.2, Isoc.3.59; later also τέτευχα, D.21.150 (cod. S), Arist.EN 1119a10, PA 647b15, freq. later, PEnteux.6.7 (iii B. C.), UPZ123.30 (ii B. C.), PStrassb.98.10 (ii B. C.), Inscr.Prien.108.287 (ii B. C.), etc.; [dialect] Dor. [tense] pf. inf.

    τετεύχεν SIG398.5

     (Cos, iii B. C.); but [dialect] Ion. [tense] plpf.

    ἐτετεύχεε Hdt.3.14

    ; τέτυχα v.l. in Ep.Hebr.8.6, v.l. in J.BJ7.5.4, ([etym.] συν- ) Aristeas 180, etc.; part.

    τετυχώς Jahresh.29

    Beibl. 163 (Stara Zagora):—[voice] Med., [tense] aor. 1

    τεύξασθαι LXX2 Ma.15.7

    :— [voice] Pass., [tense] impf.

    ἐτυγχάνετο Ant.Lib.39.3

     (dub.): elsewh. in compds, [tense] aor. 1 ἐτεύχθην ([etym.] ἐν-) Plb.35.6.1: [tense] pf. τέτευγμαι ([etym.] ἐπι-) Id.6.53.2.
    2 of events, and things generally, happen to one, befall one, come to one's lot, c. dat. pers., οὔνεκά μοι τύχε πολλά because much fell to me, Il.11.684;

    καί μοι μάλα τύγχανε πολλά Od.14.231

    ;

    θέλοιμ' ἂν ὡς πλείστοισι πημονὰς τυχεῖν A.Pr. 348

    , cf. Pers. 706 (troch.);

    οἷ' αὐτοῖς τύχοι S.Ph. 275

    ;

    εἴ τι δεσπόταισι τυγχάνει E.Alc. 138

    : abs.,

    εἰ δ' αὖθ', ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, συμφορὰ τύχοι A.Th.5

    , cf. Ag. 347, etc.;

    ἄριστα πρὸς τὸ τυγχάνον E.Hel. 1290

    , cf. Ion 1511.
    b [tense] aor. part. ὁ τυχών, the first one meets, any chance person, Hes.Th. 973, Pl.R. 539d, etc.;

    οἱ τ.

     everyday men, the vulgar,

    X.Mem.3.9.10

    , etc.;

    εἷς ἦν τῶν τ. Isoc.10.21

    ; οὐχ ὁ τ. ἀνήρ, of Moses, Longin.9.9: so of things, τὸ τυχόν any chance result, Pl.Ti. 46e;

    ὃν ἐξαλείφει πρόφασις ἡ τυχοῦσ' ὅλον E.Fr. 1041

    ; οὐχ ὁ τ. λόγος no common discourse, Pl.Lg. 723e;

    σύνεσιν οὐ τὰν τυχοῦσαν Archim.

    Spir.Praef.; οἱ τ. φόβοι trifling fears, Lycurg.37; καίπερ τὸ τ. καταβαλοῦσιν though they may have paid a trifling sum, Str.5.2.7:—Math., τυχὸν σημεῖον any point (at random), Euc.1.5, cf. 6.9; ἄλλα, ἃ ἔτυχεν, ἰσάκις πολλαπλάσια any other equimultiples taken at random, Id.5.4.
    3 in [ per.] 3sg. [tense] aor. or [tense] impf., impers. (sts. also pers.) in relat. clauses, as (when, where, etc.) it (he, she, etc.) happened (may happen, etc.), i. e. anyhow, at any time, place, etc., καὶ ἀρχομένοις καὶ μεσοῦσι καὶ ὅπως ἔτυχέ τῳ at the beginning, middle, or any other point, Th.5.20; ὡς ἔτυχε ζημιοῦσθαι to be penalized just anyhow, X.Mem.3.9.13; οὐχ ὡς ἔτυχεν in no ordinary manner, Men. Sam.79, BMus.Inscr.4.481*.340 (Ephesus, ii A. D.); τὴν μὲν δικαίαν, τὴν δ' ὅπως ἐτύγχανεν just anyhow, E.Hipp. 929; ἀποτετμάσθω δύο τμάματα ὡς ἔτυχεν let two segments be cut off at random, Archim. Con.Sph.24;

    χώρᾳ γ' ἐν ᾗ ἔτυχε X.Oec.3.3

    ;

    ὅπου ἔτυχεν Id.Cyr.8.4.3

    ;

    ὅπου ἂν τύχῃ Pl.Prt. 242e

    ;

    ὁπότε τύχοι

     sometimes,

    Pl.Phd. 89b

    ;

    ὅταν τύχῃ

     sometimes,

    E.El. 1169

     (lyr.); but, at any odd time, Th.1.142;

    ἡνίκ' ἂν τ. D.1.3

    ; ἂν τύχῃ, εἰ τύχοι, it may be, Pl.Cra. 430e, Hp.Mi. 367a;

    τὸ δέ, εἰ ἔτυχεν, οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει Id.Cra. 439c

    ;

    εἰ οὕτως ἔτυχεν Arist.Cat. 8b12

    ;

    τὸ ὅπῃ ἔτυχεν

     mere chance,

    Pl.Phlb. 28d

    : with attraction of the relat. Pron.,

    τὸ οἷς ἔτυχε προσκρούειν Plu.Cic.27

    ;

    ὡμίλει ᾧ τύχοι Plb.26.1.3

    ;

    ὧν ἔτυχε πιμπλάμενος Luc.Vit.Auct.9

    ; οὐδὲ γὰρ ὧν ἔτυχ' ἦν they were not just any acts, D.18.130.
    b c. acc. et inf.,

    ἔτυχε ὄμβρον συνεργῆσαι Plu.Alc.28

    , cf. Ael.NA5.6; ἔτυχεν ὥστε .. D.C.39.12.
    4 sts. the Verb agrees in person and number with the subject of the principal clause, perhaps by assimilation, ἀπαίροντες ἀπὸ τῆς Πελοποννήσου ὁπόθεν τύχοιεν, for ὁπόθεν τύχοι, Th.4.26, cf. 93, 5.56, 7.70, Pl.Tht. 179c; ὅ τι ἂν τύχωσι, τοῦτο λέγουσι they say just anything, Id.Prt. 353a;

    ὅ τι ἂν τύχωσι, τοῦτο πράξουτιν Id.Cri. 45d

    , cf. Grg. 522c, Smp. 181b;

    ἀναφύονται ὁπόθεν ἂν τύχῃ ἕκαστος Id.Tht. 180c

    ;

    ὡς ἐτύγχανον ἕκαστοι, ηὐλίζοντο X.An.2.2.17

    , cf. 3.1.3;

    τάχ' ἄν, εἰ τύχοιεν, σωφρονέστεροι γένοιντο D.15.16

    ;

    δουλεύειν μᾶλλον ἢ μεθ' ὁποτέρου ἂν τύχωσι τούτων ἐλευθέρους εἶναι Th.8.48

    ; πρὸς ὀργὴν ἥν τινα τύχητε ἔστιν ὅτε σφαλέντες τὴν τοῦ πείσαντος μίαν γνώμην ζημιοῦτε yielding to the impulse of the moment, Id.3.43;

    εἶτ' οὐκ ἐλήρουν ὅ τι τύχοιμ' Ar.

     Ra. 945: with attraction of the relat. Pron.,

    οὓς ἂν τύχῃς ἐπαινῶν Isoc.12.206

    .
    5 neut. part. τυχόν, used abs. like ἐξόν, παρόν, etc., since it so befell,

    οὕτως τ. Luc.Symp.43

    .
    b as Adv., perchance, perhaps, Isoc.4.171, X.An.6.1.20, Pl.Alc.2.140a, 150c, D.18.221, 21.41, Men.Pk. 184, 1 Ep.Cor.16.6;

    τ. ἴσως Epich.277

    , E.Fr.953.9, Men. Epit. 287, Plb.2.58.9; τυχὸν μὲν.., τυχὸν δὲ .. Arr.An.1.10.6, etc.
    II joined with the part. of another Verb to express a coincidence, τύχησε γὰρ ἐρχομένη νηῦς a ship happened to be, i. e. was just then, starting, Od.14.334;

    ξεῖνος ἐὼν ἐτύχησε παρ' ἱπποδάμοισι Γερηνοῖς Hes.Fr.15.3

    , cf. Semon.7.19, Pi.N.1.49;

    πρυτανεία ἣ ἂν τυγχάνῃ πρυτανεύουσα IG12.63.27

    , cf. 52; τὰ νοέων τυγχάνω what I happen to have, i.e. have at this moment, in my mind, Hdt. 1.88, cf. 8.65,68.

    ά; ἐτετεύχεε ἐπισπόμενος Id.3.14

    ; ὃ τυγχάνω μαθών which I have just learnt, S.Tr. 370; παρὼν ἐτύγχανον I was by just then, Id.Aj. 748; τυγχάνει καθεύδων he is sleeping just now, Ar.V. 336 (troch.); ἔτυχον στρατευόμενοι they were just then engaged in an expedition, Th.1.104; ἔτυχε κατὰ τοῦτο καιροῦ ἐλθών he came just at this point of time, Id.7.2; ἥτις δέ τοι μάλιστα σωφρονεῖν δοκεῖ, αὕτη μέγιστα τυγχάνει λωβωμένη she is just the one who.., Semon.7.109; but freq. τυγχάνω cannot be translated at all, esp. in phrase τυγχάνω ὤν, which is simply = εἰμί, S.Aj.88, Ar.Pl.35, Pl.Prt. 313c, etc.
    2 the part. ὤν is sts. omitted,

    ὁ γὰρ μέγιστος τυγχάνει δορυξένων S.El.46

    ; εἴ σοι χαρτὰ τυγχάνει τάδε ib. 1457; νῦν δ' ἀγροῖσι τυγχάνει ib. 313;

    ἔνδον γὰρ ἄρτι τυγχάνει Id.Aj.9

    ;

    εἴ τις εὔνους τυγχάνει Ar.Ec. 1141

    ;

    εἰ σὺ τυγχάνεις ἐπιστήμων τούτων Pl.Prt. 313e

    , cf. Grg. 502b, R. 369b, al.: sts. τυγχάνειν is used much like εἶναι, Σωτὴρ γένοιτ' ἂν Ζεὺς ἐπ' ἀσπίδος τυχών A.Th. 520; οὐκ ἀποδάμου τυχόντος not being absent, Pi.P.4.5 (cf. τόσσαις)

    ; ποῦ χρὴ τηνικαῦτα τυγχάνειν; E.IA 730

    ; τ. ἐν ἐμπύροις to be engaged in.., Id.Andr. 1113; freq. in Arist.,

    δύο μέρη τετύχηκεν ἐξ ὧν ἡ πόλις Pol. 1318a31

    , cf. 1289b16, Top. 151b11; also in later Gr.,

    τὰ ἑπτάμηνα γόνιμα τυγχάνειν Sor.1.55

    , cf. 69, al.;

    νέος πάνυ τυγχάνων PLips. 40 ii 7

     (iv A. D.), etc.:—Phryn.244 rejects this usage in Attic.
    b τυγχάνον, = τὸ ἐκτὸς ὑποκείμενον, the external reality, e. g. αὐτὸς ὁ Δίων as distd. both from the word ([etym.] φωνή) Δίων and its meaning, Stoic.2.48.
    c τὰ πράγματα τυγχάνοντα καλοῦσι (sc. οἱ Στωϊκοί) , τέλος γὰρ τὸ τυχεῖν τούτων, ib.77.
    3 later c. inf., τυγχάνομεν ἐπιδεδωκέναι we happen to have handed in.., we have just handed in.., PTeb.796.13 (ii B. C.), cf. PSI10.1118.8 (i A. D.), 1.39.4 (ii A. D.), Heliod. et Antyll. ap. Orib.44.8.21, 25, 44.23.21, Gal. 18(2).394.
    B gain one's end or purpose, succeed,

    οὐκ ἐτύχησεν ἑλίξας Il. 23.466

    ;

    εἰ τύχῃ τις ἔρδων Pi.N.7.11

    , cf. 55; τὸ τυχεῖν, = νίκη, Id.O.2.51;

    πείθειν.. τυγχάνειν θ' ἅμα E.Hec. 819

    ;

    εἰ τύχοιμεν Th.4.63

    ; τυχόντες if successful, opp. σφαλέντες, Id.3.39, cf. 82, Pi.P.10.62;

    τυγχάνουσι καὶ ἀποτυγχάνουσι Arist.Po. 1450a3

    ;

    ὀρθῶς πράττειν καὶ τ. Pl.Euthd. 280a

    ; gain one's request, Hdt.1.213 (so τυχόντα γνώμης in Th.3.42); in speaking, to be right,

    τί νιν καλοῦσα.. τύχοιμ' ἄν; A.Ag. 1233

    , cf. Ch.14, 317 (lyr.), S.Ph. 223, OC 1580;

    Δίκαν νιν προσαγορεύομεν τυχόντες καλῶς A.Ch. 950

     (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., impers., αὐτῷ πρὸς τὸ ἔργον οὐδὲν ἐτυγχάνετο nothing went right, dub. in Ant.Lib. 39.3:—in part. τυχήσας or τυχών, combined with νύξε, βάλε, οὖτα, etc., pierce, wound, etc., successfully, so that the whole phrase means hit,

    ἔγχεϊ νύξε κατὰ κληῗδα τυχήσας Il.5.579

    , cf. 858, 12.394; βάλε δουρὶ κατὰ ζωστῆρα τυχήσας ib. 189;

    ὑπὸ στέρνοιο τυχήσας βεβλήκει 4.106

    , cf. 5.98, 582, 13.371, 397, Od.19.452, al.; also conversely,

    θηρητὴρ ἐτύχησε βαλών Il.15.581

    ;

    βαλὼν τύχω Hdt.3.35

    ; also apart from such combinations, hit, c. gen.,

    προβιβάντος Il.16.609

    ;

    μηρίνθοιο 23.857

    ;

    τ. τοῦ σκοποῦ Pl.Lg. 717b

    , cf. R. 523b, Th.2.35, X.An.3.2.19, Ap.1: c. dupl. gen.,

    εἰ.. τοῦ παιδὸς.. τύχω μέσης τῆς καρδίης Hdt. 3.35

    : abs.,

    ἤμβροτες οὐδ' ἔτυχες Il.5.287

    ;

    αἰ κε τύχωμι 7.243

    , Od.22.7.
    II hit upon, light upon:
    1 meet, fall in with persons, Αακεδαίμονι.. τυχήσας having met [him] in Lacedaemon, Od.21.13: c. gen.,

    θρηνητοῦ A.Ag. 1075

    ; τριακτῆρος ib. 172 (lyr.);

    ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν Lys.2.5

    ;

    γυναικῶν X.Smp.9.7

    : with a predicate added,

    μή τευ μελαμπύγου τύχῃς Archil.110

    ;

    προφρόνων Μοισᾶν τ. Pi.I.4(3).43(61)

    ;

    θεῶν ἀμεινόνων τ. E.Heracl. 351

    ;

    ἐμοῦ.. οἰκητοῦ S.OT 1450

    , cf. 677;

    ἡμῶν τ. οἵων σε χρή E.Hel. 1300

    , cf. Lys.18.23;

    ἐρωτᾶτε αὐτοὺς ὁποίων τινῶν ἡμῶν ἔτυχον X.An.5.5.15

    ;

    τοῦ δαίμονος.. κακοδαίμονος Ar.Eq. 112

    .
    2 light on a thing,

    τύχε γάρ ἀμάθοιο βαθείης Il.5.587

    ; attain, obtain a thing, c. gen.,

    πομπῆς καὶ νόστοιο Od.6.290

    ;

    αἰδοῦς Thgn.253

    , cf. 256; [ οἴκτου] A.Pr. 241;

    ξυγγνώμης Th.7.15

    ;

    τῆς ἀξίας Ar.Av. 1223

    ; of meeting with misfortunes, βίης τυχεῖν meet with, suffer violence, Hdt.9.108; τραυμάτων, κακῶν, A.Ag. 866, E.Hec. 1280; δίκης, κρίσεως, Pl.Grg. 472d, Phdr. 249a, cf. Lg. 869b: abs., have the lot or fate,

    ἄλλος μὲν ἀποφθίσθω ἄλλος δὲ βιώτω, ὅς κε τύχῃ Il.8.430

    ;

    τὴν παρὰ Δαρείου αἰτήσας ἔτυχε μισθόν Hdt.5.23

     (where τὴν is governed by αἰτήσας).
    b after Hom. also c. acc. of neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τὰ πρόσφορα A.Ch. 711

    , cf. Eu.30, S.OC 1106, Ph. 509 (lyr.), E.Med. 758, Hec.51: later the acc. is used more freely,

    τ. ἐπίστασιν Sammelb.5235.15

     (i A. D.);

    ὑπογραφήν BGU615.23

     (ii A. D.);

    βοήθειαν PGoodsp.Cair.15.14

     (iv A. D.);

    εὐκαιρίαν PSI9.1082.5

     (iv A. D.);

    τὰ γυναίκια δεσμὸν οὐδένα βούλεται τυγχάνειν Sor.1.70b

    .
    c after either case a gen. pers. may be added, obtain a thing from a person,

    ὧν δέ σου τυχεῖν ἐφίεμαι S.Ph. 1315

    ;

    σου τοῦτο τ. Id.OC 1168

    ; or the pers. may be added with a Prep.,

    τ. ἐπαίνου ἔκ τινος Id.Ant. 665

    ;

    παρὰ σεῖο τ. φιλότητος Od.15.158

    ;

    τιμίαν ἕδραν παρ' ἀνδρῶν A.Eu. 856

     (dub.);

    αἰδοῦς ὑπό τινος X.Cyr.1.6.10

    , cf. Mem.4.8.10, etc.: abs.,

    χρὴ πρὸς μακάρων τυγχάνοντ' εὖ πασχέμεν Pi.P.3.104

    .
    d c. inf.,

    οἶμαί σου τεύξεσθαι μεθεῖναί με Pl.Phlb. 50d

    ;

    ἐὰν ψαῦσαι τοῦ νεκροῦ τύχωμεν Plu.Pel.33

    ; οὐ τυχὼν ἐπιδείξειν ( = ἐπιδεῖξαι ) not having succeeded in proving, PPetr.3p.153 (iii B. C.). (Τυ-γ-χ-άνω, with ἐτύχησα, τετύχηκα, is formed from the [tense] aor. τυχ-εῖν, which was orig. the [tense] aor. [voice] Pass. (with act. form) of τεύχω 'make'; ἔτυχε = factum est, as ἔτραφον = I was nourished (v. τρέφω); senses A.1.1-3 are the oldest and are parallel to

    τεύχω 11

     (esp.[voice] Pass.); many of the forms belong equally to both verbs; τιτύσκομαι like wise belongs to both verbs; τ (ε) υχ- from Θ (ε) υχ-, cf. ἀποθύσκειν, ἐνθύσκει, συνθύξω, and perh. Germ. taugen 'to be capable, useful', Engl. dow, doughty.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τυγχάνω

  • 4 ὡς

    ὡς:—Summary:
    A as ADVERB of Manner.
    Aa ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus.
    Ab ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. Pron. ὅς, as.
    Acὡς Relat. and Interrog., how.
    Ad ὡς temporal, when.
    Ae ὡς Local, where,
    B ὡς, as CONJUNCTION.
    C, D various usages.
    A ADVERB of Manner:
    Aa [full] ὥς, Demonstr., = οὕτως, so, thus, freq. in Hom., Il.1.33, al.;

    ὢς εἶπ' Sapph.Supp.20

    a.11 (Epic style); in [dialect] Ion. Prose, Hdt.3.13, al.; rare in [dialect] Att., and almost confined to certain phrases, v. infr. 2, 3; ὥς simply = οὕτως, A.Ag. 930, Th.3.37, Pl.Prt. 338a;

    ἀλλ' ὣς γενέσθω E.Hec. 888

    , al.
    2 καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, Il.1.116, al.; οὐδ' ὧς not even so, 7.263, Od.1.6, al., Hdt.6.76;

    οὐδέ κεν ὧς Il.9.386

    : the phrases καὶ ὧς, οὐδ' ὧς, μηδ' ὧς, are used in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 1042, Th.1.74, 7.74; also later, PCair.Zen.19.10 (iii B. C., unaccented), UPZ146.40 (ii B. C.), GDI 1832.11 (Delph., ii B. C.), IG22.850.17 (iii B. C.);

    κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα POxy.120.11

     (iv A. D.);

    δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς GDI2160

     (Delph., ii B. C.); Thess.

    καὶ οὗς IG9(2).234.1

     (iii B. C.); for this phrase the accentuation ὧς is prescribed by Hdn.Gr.2.932, al., cf. A.D.Synt.307.16, and is found in good Mss. of Homer; for the remaining uses under this head (Aa. 1, 3, 4 ) the accentuation ὥς is prescribed by the same grammarians.
    3 in Comparisons, ὥς.., ὡς .., so.. as.., etc.; and reversely ὡς.., ὣς .., as.. so, Il.1.512, 14.265, etc.; in [dialect] Att., Pl.R. 530d; also ὥς τε.. ὣς .., as.. thus.., h.Cer. 174-6, E.Ba. 1066-8;

    οἷα.. ὥς Id.El. 151

    -5; ὥσπερ.., ὣς δὲ .. (in apodosi) Pl.Prt. 326d.
    4 thus, for instance, Od.5.129, h.Ven. 218; ὥς shd. be accented in Od.5.121, 125.
    Ab [full] ὡς, Relat., as, Hom., etc.; prop. relat. to a demonstr. Adv., which is freq. omitted, κινήθη δ' ἀγορὴ ὡς κύματα μακρὰ θαλάσσης, i. e. οὕτως, ὡς .., Il.2.144 (

    φὴ Zenod.

    ): it is relat. not only to the regular demonstr. Advs. ὥς (ὧς), τώς, ὧδε, οὕτως, αὕτως, but also to ταύτῃ, Pl.R. 365d, etc. We find a collat. [dialect] Dor. form ὥ (q. v.); cf. ὥτε. Usage:
    I in similes, freq. in Hom., Il.5.161, al.; longer similes are commonly introduced by

    ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ' ὅτε, ἤριπε δ', ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] 4.462

    :

    ἤριπε δ', ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπε 13.389

    , cf. 2.394; so later, Emp.84.1, etc.;

    ὡς ὅτε θαητὸν μέγαρον, πάξομεν Pi.O.6.2

    : ὡς ὅτε is rare in short similes, Od.11.368: ὡς is folld. by indic. [tense] pres., Il.9.4, 16.364: also by [tense] aor., 3.33 sq., 4.275, 16.823, al.; also by subj. [tense] pres. or [tense] aor., 5.161, 10.183, 485, 13.334 (sts. ὡς δ' ὅτ' ἄν, 11.269, 17.520); cf. ὥστε A:—the Verb is sts. omitted with ὡς, but may be supplied from the context, ἐνδούπησε πεσοῦσ', ὡς εἰναλίη κήξ (sc. πίπτει) Od.15.479, cf. 6.20;

    θεὸς δ' ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il.5.78

    ;

    οἱ δὲ φέβοντο.., βόες ὣς ἀγελαῖαι Od.22.299

    : where ὡς follows the noun to which it refers, it takes the accent; so in Com.,

    Ἀριστόδημος ὥς Cratin.151

    , cf. Eub.75.6; v. infr. H.
    2 like as, just as,

    ὡς οὗτος κατὰ τέκν' ἔφαγε.., ὣς ἡμεῖς κτλ. Il.2.326

    , v. supr. Aa. 3.
    3 sts. in the sense as much as or according as, ἑλὼν κρέας ὥς (i. e. ὅσον)

    οἱ χεῖρες ἐχάνδανον Od.17.344

    ; ὦκα δὲ μητρὶ ἔννεπον ὡς (i. e. ὅσα)

    εἶδόν τε καὶ ἔκλυον h.Cer. 172

    ;

    τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός Od.4.105

    ;

    τόσον.. ὡς Il.4.130

    ; so in Trag.,

    σοὶ θεοὶ πόροιεν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω S.OC 1124

    ;

    ὡς ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔστιν ὑμῶν ὅστις ἐξ ἴσου νοσεῖ Id.OT60

    ; in Prose, ὡς δύναται as much as he can, Democr.278;

    τὸ ῥῆμα μέμνημαι ὡς εἶπε Aeschin.3.72

    ; ὡς μή = ὅσον μή, νέμεν ὅτι ἃν ( = ἂν)

    βόλητοι ὡς μὴ ἰν τοῖ περιχώροι IG5(2).3.9

     (Tegea, iv B. C.); cf. Ab. 11.2 infr.
    4 sts. after [comp] Comp., compared with, hence than, μᾶλλον πρέπει οὕτως ὡς .. Pl.Ap. 36d;

    ἅ γε μείζω πόνον παρέχει.. οὐκ ἂν ῥᾳδίως οὐδὲ πολλὰ ἂν εὕροις ὡς τοῦτο Id.R. 526c

    ; οὐδενὸς μᾶλλον φροντίζειν ὡς .. Plb.3.12.5, cf. 7.4.5, 11.2.9, Plu.Cor.36: μᾶσσον ὡς is dub. in A.Pr. 629, and <ἢ> shd. perh. be inserted in Lys.7.12,31; cf. ὥσπερ IV.
    II with Adverbial clauses:
    1 parenthetically, in qualifying clauses, ὡς ἔοικε, etc., Pl. Smp. 176c, etc.: in these cases γε or γοῦν is freq. added, ὡς γοῦν ὁ λόγος σημαίνει as at any rate the argument shows, Id.R. 334a; in some phrases c. inf., v. infr. B. 11.3. An anacoluthon sts. occurs by the Verb of the principal clause being made dependent on the parenthetic Verb, ὡς δὲ Σκύθαι λέγουσι, νεώτατον ἁπάντων ἐθνέων εἶναι (for ἦν)

    τὸ σφέτερον Hdt.4.5

    , cf. 1.65;

    ὡς ἐγὼ ἤκουσα, εἶναι αὐτόν Id.4.76

    ; ὡς γὰρ.. ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι .. X.An.6.4.18 codd.; ἁνὴρ ὅδ' ὡς ἔοικεν οὐ νεμεῖν (for οὐ νεμεῖ, ὡς ἔοικε), S.Tr. 1238.
    2 in elliptical phrases, so far as.. (cf. supr. Ab.1.3)

    ὡς ἐμοί Id.Aj. 395

     (lyr.); so

    ὥς γε ἐμοὶ κριτῇ Ael.VH2.41

     and

    ὥς γ' ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ E.Alc. 801

    ;

    ὡς ἐμῇ δόξῃ X.Vect.5.2

    ; ὡς ἀπ' ὀμμάτων (sc. εἰκάσαι) to judge by eyesight, S.OC15: esp. in such phrases as

    οὐκέτι πολλὸν χωρίον, ὡς εἶναι Αἰγύπτου Hdt.2.8

    ; οὐδὲ ἀδύνατος, ὡς Αακεδαιμόνιος for a Lacedaemonian, Th.4.84, cf. D.H.10.31;

    ὡς ἀνθρώποις Alcmaeon 1

    ; φρονεῖ.. ὡς γυνὴ μέγα for a woman, S.OT 1078; πιστός, ὡς νομεύς, ἀνήρ ib. 1118;

    μακρὰν ὡς γέροντι.. ὁδόν Id.OC20

    , cf. 385, Ant.62, etc.;

    ὡπλισμένοι ὡς ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἱκανῶς X.An.4.3.31

    ; also with

    ἄν, μεγάλα ἐκτήσατο χρήματα, ὡς ἂν εἶναι Ῥοδῶπιν Hdt.2.135

     codd. (ἂν secl. Krüger, Ῥοδώπιος cj. Valck.):—for ὡς εἰπεῖν and the like , v. infr. B. 11.3.
    3 ὡς attached to the object of the Verb, as,

    ἑωυτὸν ὡς ἐχθρὸν λυπέει Democr.88

    ;

    ἔλαβεν ἀμφοτέρους ὡς φίλους ἤδη X.Cyr.3.2.25

    ;

    ἐν οἰκήματι ᾧ ὡς ταμιείῳ ἐχρῆτο Pl.Prt. 315d

    .— For the similar usage of ὡς with Participles and Prepositions, v. infr. c.
    III with Adverbs:
    a with the Posit.,

    ὡς ἀληθῶς

     truly,

    Pl.Phdr. 234e

     (cf.

    ἀληθής 111.1b

    : as if Adv. of τὸ ἀληθές) ; ὡς ἑτέρως in the other way, ib. 276c, D.18.212 (Adv. of ὁ ἕτερος; v. ἕτερος v. 2) (v. infr. D.1.1); ὡς ἠπίως, ὡς ἐτητύμως, S.El. 1438 (lyr.), 1452;

    ὡς ὁμοίως SIG708.34

     (Istropolis, ii B. C.), LXX 4 Ma.5.21, 1 Enoch5.3, IG7.2725.16 (Acraeph., ii A. D.);

    ὡς ἐναλλάξ Vett.Val. 215.9

    , 340.2;

    ὡς παντελῶς Id.184.26

    ;

    ὡς ἄλλως Is.7.27

    , D.6.32;

    ὡς ἐνδεχομένως PPetr.2p.53

     (iii B. C.); in ὣς αὔτως (v. ὡσαύτως ) we have the Adv. of ὁ αὐτός, but the ὥς retains its demonstr. force, as does ὁ in Homer; ὡς ἀληθῶς, ὡς ὁμοίως, and ὡς παντελῶς may be modelled on ὣς αὔτως, with which they are nearly synonymous; so also ὡς ἑτέρως and ὡς ἐναλλάξ, which are contrasted with it.
    b with Advbs. expressing anything extraordinary, θαυμαστῶς or θαυμασίως ὡς, ὑπερφυῶς ὡς, v. sub vocc.; ὡς is sts. separated by several words from its Adv., as

    θαυμαστῶς μοι εἶπες ὡς παρα' δόξαν Pl.Phd. 95a

    ;

    ὑπερφυῶς δὴ τὸ χρῆμα ὡς δύσγνωστον φαίνεται Id.Alc.2.147c

    , cf. Phd. 99d.
    c with the [comp] Sup., as much as can be,

    ὡς μάλιστα Th.1.141

    , etc.: ὡς ῥᾷστα as easily as possible, A.Pr. 104;

    ὡς πλεῖστα Democr. 189

    ; ὠς τάχιστα as quickly as possible, Alc.Supp.4.15, etc.; more fully expressed,

    ὡς δυνατὸν ἄριστα Isoc.12.153

    ;

    ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα Th.7.50

    ;

    μαχομένους ὡς ἂν δυνώμεθα κράτιστα X.An.3.2.6

    ;

    ὡς οἷόν τε βελτιστον Pl.R. 403d

    ; ὡς ἀνυστὸν κάλλιστα Diog.Apollon.3: ὡς and ὅτι are sts. found together, where one is superfluous,

    ὡς ὅτι μάλιστα Pl.Lg. 908a

    ;

    βοῦν ὡς ὅτι κάλλιστον IG22.1028.17

     (ii/i B. C.); v. infr. G.
    d with [comp] Comp.,

    ὡς θᾶσσον Plb.1.66.1

    , 3.82.1.
    e in the phrases ὡς τὸ πολύ, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, Pl.R. 330c, 377b; ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον for the more part, commonly,

    ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον Th.2.34

    ; ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος, ὡς πλήθει, Pl.R. 364a, 389d;

    ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν Hdt.7.50

    , etc.;

    ὡς τὰ πολλά Ael.NA12.17

    .
    2 with Adjs.,
    a Posit.,

    ὑπερφυεῖ τινι.. ὡς μεγάλῃ βλάβῃ Pl.Grg. 477d

    .
    Ac Relat. and Interrog., how,

    μερμήριζε.. ὡς Ἀχιλῆα τιμήσειε Il. 2.3

    , cf. Pl.R. 365a;

    ἐβουλεύοντο ὡς.. στήσονται Hdt.3.84

    , etc.;

    οἷα δεῖ λέγειν καὶ ὥς Arist.EN 1128a1

    ; ὡς πέπραται how, i. e. at what price the goods have been sold, PCair.Zen. 149 (iii B. C.); so οὐκ ἔσθ' ὡς .. (for the more usu. ὅπως ) nowise can it be that.., S.Ant. 750; οὐκ ἔσθ' ὡς οὐ .., Id.Ph. 196 (anap., Porson for οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως ου) ; οἶσθ' ὡς πόησον; by a mixture of constructions for ὡς χρὴ ποιῆσαι or ὡς ποιήσεις, Id.OT 543, cf. Hermipp.43, Men.916; οἶσθ' ὡς μετεύξει is f.l. in E.Med. 600 ( μέτευξαι Elmsley); similarly,

    οἶσθα.. ὡς νῦν μὴ σφαλῇς S.OC75

    .
    2 ὡς ἂν ποήσῃς however ( in whatever way) thou mayest act, Id.Aj. 1369, cf. Pl.Smp. 181a;

    αὐτῷ ὥς κεν ἅδῃ, τὼς ἔσσεται A.R.3.350

    .
    Ad Temporal, when, with past tenses of the indic.,

    ἐνῶρτο γέλως.., ὡς ἴδον Il.1.600

    : with opt., to express a repeated action, whenever,

    ὡς.. ἐς τὴν Μιλησίην ἀπίκοιτο Hdt.1.17

    : rarely c. subj., to denote what happens under certain conditions,

    τῶν δὲ ὡς ἕκαστός οἱ μειχθῇ, διδοῖ δῶρον Id.4.172

    , cf. 1.132; later, ὡς ἄν c. subj., when, PCair.Zen.251 (iii B. C.), 1 Ep.Cor.11.34, etc.;

    ὥς κα Berl.Sitzb.1927.170

     ([place name] Cyrene); ὡς ἂν τάχιστα λάβῃς τὴν ἐπιστολήν as soon as.. PCair.Zen.241.1 (iii B. C.), cf. LXX 1 Ki.9.13, Jo.3.8: in orat. obliq. c. inf., Hdt.1.86, 96, al.: expressed more forcibly by ὡς.. τάχιστα, some word or words being interposed, ὡς γὰρ ἐπετρόπευσε τάχιστα as soon as ever.., Id.1.65;

    ὡς δὲ ἀφίκετο τάχιστα X.Cyr.1.3.2

    : less freq. ὡς τάχιστα stand together, Aeschin.2.22: but this usage must be distd. from signf. Ab.111.1c: folld. by demonstr.,

    ὡς εἶδ', ὣς ἀνεπᾶλτο Il.20.424

    ;

    ὡς ἴδεν, ὥς μιν ἔρως πυκινὰς φρένας ἀμφεκάλυψεν 14.294

    ; also

    ὡς.., ἔπειτα 3.396

    ;

    Κρονίδης ὥς μιν φράσαθ' ὣς ἐόλητο θυμὸν ἀνωΐστοισιν ὑποδμηθεὶς βελέεσσι Κύπριδος Mosch.2.74

    ; the second ὣς is repeated,

    ἁ δ' Ἀταλάντα ὡς ἴδεν, ὣς ἐμάνη, ὣς ἐς βαθὺν ἅλατ' ἔρωτα Theoc.3.41

     (ὣς = εὐθέως, Sch.vet.), cf. 2.82; in Bion 1.40 the clauses with ὡς all belong to the protasis.
    2 ὡς appears to be f.l. for ἕως in

    ὡς ἂν αὑτὸς ἥλιος.. αἴρῃ S.Ph. 1330

    ,

    ὡς ἂν ᾖς οἷόσπερ εἶ Id.Aj. 1117

    ; cf.

    ὥσπερ 111.1

    : but in later Gr. = ἕως, while,

    ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε Ev.Jo.12.35

    , 36;

    ὡς καιρὸν ἔχομεν Ep.Gal.6.10

    , cf. Epigr.Gr.646a5 (p.529); also until,

    τίθεται ἐπὶ ἀνθράκων ὡς ἀναξηρανθῇ PLeid.X.89

     B.; ἔα ἀφρίζειν τὴν πίσσαν ὡς οὗ ἐκλείπῃ ib.37B.; cf. EM824.43 (conversely ἕως for ὡς final, v. ἕως (B) A. 1.4).
    Ae Local, where, in dialects, Theoc.1.13, 5.101, 103, IG9(2).205.4 (Melitea, iii B. C.), SIG685.63, al. (Cretan, ii B. C.), IG12(1).736.5 ([place name] Camirus), GDI5597.8 (Ephesus, iii B. C.).
    B [full] ὡς as CONJUNCTION:
    I with Substantive clauses, to express a fact, = ὅτι, that.
    II with Final clauses, to express an end or purpose, = ἵνα, ὅπως, so that, in order that.
    III Consecutive, = ὥστε, so that.
    IV Causal, since, because.
    I with Substantive Clauses, with verbs of learning, saying, etc., that, expressing a fact,

    γνωτὸν.., ὡς ἤδη Τρώεσσιν ὀλέθρου πείρατ' ἐφῆπται Il.7.402

    , cf. Od.3.194, etc.: in commands,

    προεῖπεν ὡς μηδεὶς κινήσοιτο X.HG2.1.22

    : with Verbs of fear or anxiety, c. [tense] fut. indic.,

    μηκέτ' ἐκφοβοῦ, μητρῷον ὥς σε λῆμ' ἀτιμάσει ποτέ S.El. 1427

    , cf. X.Cyr.6.2.30; μὴ φοβοῦ ὡς ἀπορήσεις ib.5.2.12, cf. D.10.36; a sentence beginning with ὡς is sts., when interrupted, resumed by ὅτι, and vice versa, X.Cyr.5.3.30, Pl.R. 470d, Hp.Ma. 281c; so ὡς with a finite Verb passes into the acc. and inf., Hdt.1.70, 8.118: both constructions mixed in the same clause, ἐλογίζετο ὡς.. ἧττον ἂν αὐτοὺς ἐθέλειν .. X.Cyr.8.1.25, cf. HG3.4.27: after primary tenses (incl. historic [tense] pres.) ὡς is folld. by indic., after historic tenses by opt. (sts. by indic., both constructions in

    ὑπίσχοντο.. ἀμυνέειν, φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη.. ἀλλὰ τιμωρητέον εἴη Hdt.7.168

    ): sts. c. opt. after a primary tense,

    κατάπτονται.. λέγοντες ὡς Ἀρίστων.. οὐ φήσειε Id.6.69

    , cf. 1.70, Th.1.38, Pl.Chrm. 156b.
    2 with Verbs of feeling,

    χαίρει δέ μοι ἦτορ, ὥς μευ ἀεὶ μέμνησαι Il.23.648

    ;

    ἄχος ἔλλαβ' Ἀχαιοὺς ὡς ἔπεσ' 16.600

    .
    II with Final Clauses, that, in order that; in this sense ὡς and ὡς ἄν, [dialect] Ep. ὥς κεν, are used with the subj. after primary tenses of the indic., and with the opt. after the past tenses,

    βουλὴν ὑποθησόμεθ'.., ὡς μὴ πάντες ὄλωνται Il.8.37

    ;

    τύμβον χεύαμεν.., ὥς κεν τηλεφανὴς.. εἴη Od. 24.83

    ;

    ἡμεῖς δ' ἴωμεν ὡς, ὁπηνίκ' ἂν θεὸς πλοῦν ἡμὶν εἴκῃ, τηνικαυθ' ὁρμώμεθα S.Ph. 464

    ;

    [νέας] διηκοσίας περιέπεμπον.. ὡς ἂν μὴ ὀφθείησαν Hdt.8.7

    . b. rarely c. [tense] fut. indic., ὡς μὴ ὦν αὐτοὶ τε ἀπολέεσθε (cj. Cobet for ἀπόλεσθε)

    κἀμὲ τρώσετε, ἐς ἄλλον τινὰ δῆμον ἀποίχεσθε Hecat. 30J.

    2 ὡς is also used with past tenses of the indic. to express a purpose which has not been or cannot be fulfilled, τί μ' οὐκ ἔκτεινας, ὡς ἔδειξα μήποτε .. ; so that I never should.., S.OT 1392;

    ἔδει τὰ ἐνέχυρα λαβεῖν, ὡς μηδ' εἰ ἐβούλετο ἐδύνατο ἐξαπατᾶν X.An. 7.6.23

    ; cf.

    ἵνα B. 1.3

    ,

    ὅπως B. 1.3

    .
    3 ὡς c. inf., to limit an assertion,

    ὡς μὲν ἐμοὶ δοκέειν Hdt.6.95

    , cf. 2.124; ὡς εἰπεῖν λόγῳ ib.53; or ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, cf.

    ἔπος 11.4

    ; ὡς συντόμως, or ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν to speak shortly, to be brief, X.Oec.12.19, Mem.3.8.10; ὡς εἰκάσαι to make a guess, i.e. probably, Hdt.1.34, etc.;

    ὡς μικρὸν μεγάλῳ εἰκάσαι Th.4.36

     (so without

    ὡς, οὐ πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν Hdt. 1.61

    ), v. supr. Ab. 11.1, 2.
    III to express Consequence, like ὥστε, so that, freq. in Hdt., εὖρος ὡς δύο τριήρεας πλέειν ὁμοῦ in breadth such that two triremes could sail abreast, Hdt.7.24;

    ὑψηλὸν οὕτω.., ὡς τὰς κορυφὰς αὐτοῦ οὐκ οἷά τε εἶναι ἰδέσθαι 4.184

    ; so in Trag. and Prose, A.Pers. 437, al., S.OT84, X.An.3.5.7, etc.;

    ἀπέχοντας ἀπ' ἀλλάλων ὡς ἦμεν Ϝικατίπεδον ἄντομον Tab.Heracl.1.75

    ;

    οὕτως.. ὡς ὁμολογεῖν Jul.Or.5.164d

    ;

    ὡς καὶ τοὺς τεχνίτας λανθάνειν PHolm. 9.13

    ; also, like ὥστε, with Indic.,

    οὕτω κλεινὴ ἐγένετο, ὡς.. ἐξέμαθον Hdt.2.135

    , cf. S.Tr. 590, X.HG4.1.33.
    2 ἢ ὡς after a [comp] Comp.,

    μάσσον' ἢ ὡς ἰδέμεν Pi.O.13.113

    ;

    μαλακώτεροι.. ἢ ὡς κάλλιον αὐτοῖς Pl.R. 410d

    ; cf.

    ὥστε B. 1.2

    : with words implying comparison, ὀλίγοι ἐσμὲν ὡς ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι αὐτῶν too few to.., X.Cyr.4.5.15, γραῦς εἶ, ὦ Ἐλπινίκη, ὡς τηλικαῦτα διαπράττεσθαι πράγματα too old to.. Stesimbr. 5J.
    3 ὡς is sts. omitted where the antecedent demonstrative is expressed, οὕτω ἰσχυραί, μόγις ἂν διαρρήξειας so strong, you could hardly break them, Hdt.3.12;

    ῥώμη σώματος τοιήδε, ἀεθλοφόροι τε ἀμφότεροι ἦσαν Id.1.31

    .
    IV Causal, inasmuch as, since,

    τί ποτε λέγεις, ὦ τέκνον; ὡς οὐ μανθάνω S.Ph. 914

    , cf. E.Ph. 843, 1077, Ar.Ra. 278: c. opt.,

    μὴ καὶ λάθῃ με προσπεσών· ὡς μᾶλλον ἂν ἕλοιτο μ' ἢ τοὺς πάντας Ἀργείους λαβεῖν S.Ph.46

    .
    2 on the ground that.., c. [tense] fut. indic., Lys.30.27.
    C [full] ὡς before
    I Participles;
    II Prepositions; and
    III ὡς itself as a Preposition.
    I with Participles in the case of the Subject, to mark the reason or motive of the action, as if, as,

    ὡς οὐκ ἀΐοντι ἐοικώς Il.23.430

     (v. infr. G); ἀγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπεστερημένοι (i. e. ἡγούμενοι μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπεστερῆσθαι), Pl.R. 329a: most freq. c. part. [tense] fut.,

    διαβαίνει.., ὡς ἀμήσων τὸν σῖτον Hdt.6.28

    , cf. 91;

    παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς πολεμήσοντες Th.2.7

    , etc.;

    δηλοῖς ὥς τι σημανῶν νέον S.Ant. 242

    ;

    ὡς τεθνήξων ἴσθι νυνί Ar.Ach. 325

     (troch.): in questions,

    παρὰ Πρωταγόραν νῦν ἐπιχειρεῖς ἰέναι, ὡς παρὰ τίνα ἀφιξόμενος; Pl.Prt. 311b

    ;

    ὡς τί δὴ θέλων; E.IT 557

    ; with vbs. of knowing,

    ἐπιστάσθω Κροῖσος ὡς ὕστερον.. ἁλοὺς τῆς πεπρωμένης Hdt.1.91

    ; ὡς μὴ 'μπολήσων ἴσθι .. S.Ant. 1063.
    2 with Participles in oblique cases, λέγουσιν ἡμᾶς ὡς ὀλωλότας they speak of us as dead, A.Ag. 672;

    ὡς μηδὲν εἰδότ' ἴσθι μ' ὧν ἀνιστορεῖς S.Ph. 253

    ;

    τὸν ἐκβαίνοντα κολάζουσιν ὡς παρανομοῦντα Pl.R. 338e

    ;

    ἵνα μὴ ἀγανακτῇ ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ ὡς δεινὰ πάσχοντος Id.Phd. 115e

    , cf. Hdt.5.85, 9.54;

    νῦν δέ σου τὰ ἔργα φανερὰ γεγένηται οὐχ ὡς ἀνιωμένου ἀλλ' ὡς ἡδομένου τοῖς γιγνομένοις Lys.12.32

    ;

    κτύπος φωτὸς ὡς τειρομένου < του> S.Ph. 202

     (lyr.); ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο, ὡς, ὅταν ἐξέλθωσιν, ἢ οὐχ ὑπομενοῦντας σφᾶς ἢ ῥᾳδίως ληψόμενοι βίᾳ made light of the matter, in the belief that.., Th.4.5.—Both constructions in one sentence,

    τοὺς κόσμους εἴασε χαίρειν ὡς ἀλλοτρίους τε ὄντας καὶ πλέον θάτερον ἡγησάμενος ἀπεργάζεσθαι Pl.Phd. 114e

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.5.9.
    3 with Parts. put abs. in gen.,

    νῦν δέ, ὡς οὕτω ἐχόντων, στρατιὴν ἐκπέμπετε Hdt.8.144

    ; ἐρώτα

    ὅτι βούλει, ὡς τἀληθῆ ἐροῦντος X.Cyr.3.1.9

    ;

    ὡς ὧδ' ἐχόντων τῶνδ' ἐπίστασθαί σε χρή S.Aj. 281

    , cf. 904, A.Pr. 760, E.Med. 1311, Th.7.15, X.An.1.3.6: so also in acc.,

    μισθὸν αἰτοῦσιν, ὡς οὐχὶ αὐτοῖσιν ὠφελίαν ἐσομένην ἐκ τοῦ ἄρχειν Pl.R. 345e

    , cf. E.Ph. 1461: with both cases in one sentence,

    ὡς καὶ τῶν Ἀθηναίων προσδοκίμων ὄντων ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ καὶ.. διαπεπολεμησόμενον Th.7.25

    , cf. Pl.R. 604b.
    II ὡς before Preps., ἀνήγοντο ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν (v.l. -ίᾳ) Th.1.48, cf. X. HG2.1.22;

    φρύγανα συλλέγοντες ὡς ἐπὶ πῦρ Id.An.4.3.11

    ; κατέλαβε τὴν ἀκρόπολιν ὡς ἐπὶ τυραννίδι, expressing the purpose, Th.1.126;

    ἀπέπλεον.. ὡς ἐς τὰς Ἀθήνας Id.6.61

    ;

    πλεῖς ὡς πρὸς οἶκον S.Ph.58

    ;

    τὸ βούλευμ' ὡς ἐπ' Ἀργείοις τόδ' ἦν Id.Aj.44

    : in these passages ὡς marks an intention; not so in the following:

    ἀπαγγέλλετε τῇ μητρὶ [χαίρειν] ὡς παρ' ἐμοῦ X.Cyr.8.7.28

    ; also

    ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς πομπῆς Pl.R. 327c

    ;

    ὡς ἐκ κακῶν ἐχάρη Hdt.8.101

    .
    b later, in geographical expressions, of direction,

    προϊών, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸν Πηνειόν Str.9.5.8

    , cf. 13.1.22;

    ὡς πρὸς ἕω βλέπων Id.8.6.1

    , cf. 7.6.2; ὡς εἰς Φηραίαν (leg. Ἡραίαν)

    ἰόντων Id.8.3.32

    .
    III ὡς as a Prep., prop. in cases where the object is a person, not a place: once in Hom.,

    ὡς αἰεὶ τὸν ὁμοῖον ἄγει θεὸς ὡς τὸν ὁμοῖον Od.17.218

     (v.l. ἐς τὸν ὁμοῖον, cf.

    αἶνος Ὁμηρικός, αἰὲν ὁμοῖον ὡς θεός.. ἐς τὸν ὁμοῖον ἄγει Call.Aet.1.1.10

    ; ἔρχεται.. ἕκαστον τὸ ὅμοιον ὡς τὸ ὅ., τὸ πυκνὸν ὡς τὸ πυκνόν κτλ. (with v.l. ἐς) Hp.Nat.Puer.17), but possibly ὡς.. ὥς as.. so, in Od. l.c.; also in Hdt.,

    ἐσελθεῖν ὡς τὴν θυγατέρα 2.121

    .έ: freq. in [dialect] Att.,

    ὡς Ἆγιν ἐπρεσβεύσαντο Th.8.5

    , etc.;

    ἀφίκετο ὡς Περδίκκαν καὶ ἐς τὴν Χαλκιδικήν Id.4.79

    ;

    ἀπέπλευσαν ἐς Φώκαιαν.. ὡς Ἀστύοχον Id.8.31

    ; ναῦς ἐς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ὡς Φαρνάβαζον ἀποπέμπειν ib.39;

    ὡς ἐκεῖνον πλέομεν ὥσπερ πρὸς δεσπότην Isoc. 4.121

    ; the examples of ὡς with names of places are corrupt, e.g.

    ὡς τὴν Μίλητον Th.8.36

     (ἐς cod. Vat.); ὡς Ἄβυδον one Ms. in Id.8.103;

    ὡς τὸ πρόσθεν Ar.Ach. 242

    : in S.OT 1481 ὡς τὰς ἀδελφὰς.. τὰς ἐμὰς χέρας is equiv. to ὡς ἐμὲ τὸν ἀδελφόν; in Id.Tr. 366 δόμους ὡς τούσδε house = household.
    D [full] ὡς in independent sentences:
    I as an exclamation, how, mostly with Advbs. and Adjs., ὡς ἄνοον κραδίην ἔχες how silly a heart hadst thou! Il.21.441; ὡς ἀγαθὸν καὶ παῖδα λιπέσθαι how good is it.., Od.3.196, cf. 24.194;

    φρονεῖν ὡς δεινόν S.OT 316

    ; ὡς ἀστεῖος ὁ ἄνθρωπος how charming he is! Pl.Phd. 116d;

    ὡς ἐμεγαλύνθη τὰ ἔργα σου, Κύριε LXX Ps.91(92).6

    , 103(104).24; in indirect clauses, ἐθαύμασα τοῦτο, ὡς ἡδέως.. ἀπεδέξατο marvelled at seeing how.., Pl. Phd. 89a.
    2 with Verbs, ὥς μοι δέχεται κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ αἰεί how constantly.., Il.19.290, cf. 21.273; ὡς οὐκ ἔστι χάρις μετόπισθ' εὐεργέων how little thanks remain! Od.22.319; ὡς ὄχλος νιν.. ἀμφέπει see how.., E.Ph. 148; ὡς ὑπερδέδοικά σου how greatly.., S.Ant.82; so perh.

    ὡς οἰμώξεται Ar.Ra. 279

    ;

    ὡς ἅπανθ' ὑμῖν τυραννίς ἐστι Id.V. 488

     (troch.).
    II to mark a wish, oh that! c. opt. alone,

    ὡς ἔρις.. ἀπόλοιτο Il.18.107

    ;

    ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος Od.1.47

    , cf. S.El. 126 (lyr.); also ὡς ἄν or κε with opt.,

    ὡς ἂν ἔπειτ' ἀπὸ σεῖο οὐκ ἐθέλοιμι λείπεσθαι Il.9.444

    ;

    ὥς κέ οἱ αὖθι γαῖα χάνοι 6.281

    .
    E [full] ὡς with numerals marks that they are to be taken only as a round number, as it were, about, nearly,

    σὺν ἀνθρώποις ὡς εἴκοσι X.An.3.3.5

    ; also ὡς πέντε μάλιστά κῃ about five (v.

    μάλα 111.5

    ), Hdt.7.30:—also with words compounded with numerals,

    δέπας.. ὡς τριλάγυνον Stesich.7

    ; παῖς ὡς ἑπτέτης of some seven years, Pl. Grg. 471c;

    δρέπανα ὡς διπήχη X.Cyr.6.1.30

    , cf. An.5.4.12; cf.

    ὡσεί 111

    .
    F [full] ὡς in some elliptical (or apparently elliptical) phrases:
    1 ὡς τί δὴ τόδε (sc. γένηται); to what end? E.Or. 796 (troch.); cf.

    ἵνα B.11.3c

    .
    2 know that (sc. ἴσθι)

    , ὡς ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς τοῦδε τἄργα ταῦτά σοι S.Aj.39

    ;

    ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρει δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117

    ;

    ὡς τῆσδ' ἑκοῦσα παιδὸς οὐ μεθήσομαι E.Hec. 400

    , cf. Med. 609, Ph. 720; ὡς τάχ' οὐκέθ' αἱματηρὸν.. ἀργήσει ξίφος ib. 625 (troch.); so in Com.,

    ὡς ἔστ' ἐν ἡμῖν τῆς πόλεως τὰ πράγματα Ar.Lys.32

    , cf. 499 (anap.), Ach. 333 (troch.), Nu. 209; also

    ἀλλ' ὡς ἀπὸ τοῦ τείχους πάρεστιν ἄγγελος οὐδείς Id.Av. 1119

    .
    3 ὡς ἕκαστος, ἕκαστοι, each severally (whether in respect of time, place, or other difference),

    ξυνελέγοντο.. Κορίνθιοι δισχίιοι ὁπλῖται, οἱ δ' ἄλλοι ὡς ἕκαστοι, Φλειάσιοι δὲ πανστρατιᾷ Th.5.57

    , cf. 1.107, 113; πρώτη τε αὕτη πόλις ξυμμαχὶς παρὰ τὸ καθεστηκὸς ἐδουλώθη, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὡς ἑκάστη [ξυνέβη] (ξ. secl. Krüger: ἀπὸ κοινοῦ ἐδουλώθη Sch.l.c.) Id.1.98; ἄλλοι τε παριόντες ἐγκλήματα ἐποιοῦντο ὡς ἕκαστοι ib.67, cf. 7.65; χρησμολόγοι τε ᾖδον χρησμοὺς παντοίους, ὧν ἀκροᾶσθαι ὡς ἕκαστος ὥρμητο, i. e. different persons ran to listen to different prophecies, Id.2.21; τὰς ἄλλας ὡς ἑκάστην ποι ἐκπεπτωκυῖαν ἀναδησάμενοι ἐκόμιζον ἐς τὴν πόλιν they made fast to the rest wherever each (ship) had been run ashore, Id.7.74; οἱ δ' οὖν ὡς ἕκαστοι Ἕλληνες κατὰ πόλεις τε ὅσοι ἀλλήλων ξυνίεσαν καὶ ξύμπαντες ὕστερον κληθέντες οὐδὲν πρὸ τῶν Τρωικῶν.. ἁθρόοι ἔπραξαν the various peoples that were later called by the common name of Greeks, Id.1.3;

    ὡς ἑκάστῳ ἔργον προστάσσων Hdt.1.114

    ; ὡς ἑκάστην ( one by one) αἱρέοντες (sc. τὰς νήσους)

    οἱ βάρβαροι ἐσαγήνευον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους Id.6.31

    , cf. 79;

    ὡς ἑκασταχόσε D.C.41.9

    , al.; rarely with a Verb,

    ὡς ἕκαστος ἀπικνέοιτο Hdt.1.29

    , cf. Th.6.2: later ὡς follows

    ἕκαστος, ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Θεὸς ἐμέρισεν μέτρον πίστεως Ep.Rom.12.3

    :—for the etymology v. infr. H; also

    ὡς ἑκάτεροι Th.3.74

     (v. infr. H).
    G [full] ὡς pleonast. in

    ὡς ὅτι D.H. 9.14

    , 2 Ep.Cor.11.21, Sch.A Il.1.264, 129, 396, 3.280, AP9.530, dub.l. in Str.15.1.57.
    H Etymology: this word is in origin five distinct words: (1) ὡς 'as' is the Adv. fr. the Relat. ὅς (I.-E. stem yo-); with ὡς βέλτιστος cf. Skt. yācchrē[snull ][tnull ]á[hudot ] 'the best possible': (2) ὧς ' thus' is the Adv. of a Demonstr. stem so- found in Skt. sa, Gr. ὁ, Lat. sō-c (Gloss. = ita, cf. Umbr. esoc); (3) ὡς postpositive (ὄρνιθες ὥς, etc.) constantly makes a preceding short closed syll. long in Hom., and must therefore have been ϝως; it may perh. be related to Skt. vā, a form of va, iva ( = (1) or (2) like), Lat. ve, Gr. ἦ[ϝ] ε; (4) ὡς prep. 'to' is of doubtful origin (perh. fr. Ως, cogn. with Lat. ōs 'face', Skt. ās: Ως τινα ἐλθεῖν like τί δέ δε φρένας ἵκετο πένθος;); (5) ὡς F.3 is prob. ϝως, Adv. of ϝός the reflexive Adj., and means lit. in his (their) own way (or place); it is idiomatically placed before ἕκαστος ([etym.] ἑκάτερος), cf.

    ϝὸν ϝεκάτερος Leg.Gort.1.18

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὡς

  • 5 σάρξ

    σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ (Hom.+; ‘flesh’).
    ① the material that covers the bones of a human or animal body, flesh lit. 1 Cor 15:39abcd; Hv 3, 10, 4; 3, 12, 1. The pl. (which denotes flesh in the mass [Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 5], whereas the sing. rather denotes the substance.—Herodas 4, 61; Gen 40:19; 1 Km 17:44; 4 Km 9:36; PsSol 4:19; TestJob 13:5; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 211; Just., A I, 26, 7; Mel., P. 52, 383; Ath. 34, 2) Lk 24:39 v.l.; Rv 19:18, 21 (4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010, 16] cannibalism out of hunger, sim. Mel., P. 52, 383; Quint. Smyrn. 11, 245: the σάρκες of the slain are food for the birds) B 10:4; metaph. Rv 17:16. It decays 1 Cl 25:3; cp. Ac 2:31 (cp. 2a below). Normally gives forth an evil odor when burned MPol 15:2. W. bones (s. ὀστέον) 1 Cl 6:3 (Gen 2:23); Lk 24:39; Eph 5:30 v.l. (metaph.). Paul speaks of his illness as a σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί (s. σκόλοψ) 2 Cor 12:7. ἡ ἐν σαρκὶ περιτομή the physical circumcision (cp. Just., D. 10, 1 al.) Ro 2:28; cp. Eph 2:11b; Col 2:13 (ἀκροβυστία 2); Gal 6:13 (ἡ σάρξ=the flesh that is circumcised); B 9:4. Metaph.: the corrosion on the precious metals of the rich φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ Js 5:3.—Ign. describes the elements of the Eucharist as σὰρξ (or αἷμα) Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ IRo 7:3; IPhld 4; ISm 7:1. Also J 6:51–56 urges that one must eat the flesh (and drink the blood) of the Human One or Son of Man (Just., A I, 66, 2; s. TPhilips, Die Verheissung der hl. Eucharistie nach Joh. 1922; Bultmann ad loc.; AWikenhauser ’48, 105f).—His anti-Docetic position also leads Ign. to use the concept ‘flesh (and blood) of Christ’ in other contexts as well ITr 8:1; IPhld 5:1.—For Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12; and 1 Cor 15:50 s. 3a.
    ② the physical body as functioning entity, body, physical body
    ⓐ as substance and living entity (Aeschyl., Sept. 622: opp. νοῦς; Ex 30:32; 4 Km 6:30; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 6 [Stone p. 54] πάντα τὰ μέλη τῆς σαρκός μου; w. καρδία or ψυχή Alex. Aphr., An. p. 98, 7–10 Br.; Ps 37:8; 62:2; Eccl 2:3; Ezk 11:19; 44:7 a1.; Jos., Bell. 6, 47, Ant. 19, 325; Ar.15, 7) οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν Ac 2:31 (but s. 1). W. ψυχή 1 Cl 49:6 (Tat. 13:2 al.). W. καρδία Ac 2:26 (Ps 15:9).—Eph 5:29. ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί they have seen me face to face Col 2:1. ἕως ἂν τὸν χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἴδῃ before he had seen the Messiah in person GJs 24:4 (cp. Lk 2:26). Opp. πνεῦμα (Ath. 31:3; PGM 5, 460 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε τὸν κτίσαντα πᾶσαν σάρκα κ. πᾶν πνεῦμα) 1 Cor 5:5; 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5; 1 Pt 4:6; Hm 3:1; 10, 2, 6; cp. AcPl Ant 13:17 (=Aa, I 237, 2; s. οἶδα); also in relation to Christ (though this is disputed) J 6:63; Hs 5, 6, 5–7; cp. 1 Ti 3:16.—ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός bodily ailment Gal 4:13; s. vs. 14. ἀσθενὴς τῇ σαρκί weak in the body Hs 9, 1, 2. ὁ ἀλγῶν σάρκα the one who is ill in body B 8:6. πάσχειν σαρκί 1 Pt 4:1b. Cp. 2 Cor 7:5. ἡ τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότης the purity of the body Hb 9:13 (opp. καθαρίζειν τὴν συνείδησιν vs. 14). σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου 1 Pt 3:21 (s. ῥύπος 1). The σάρξ is raised fr. the dead (s. ParJer 6:9; Theoph. Ant. 1, 7 [74, 2]) 1 Cl 26:3; 2 Cl 9:1. ἀνάστασις σαρκός AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24 (σαρκὸς ἀνάστασιν Just., D. 80, 5); cp. ἀναστήσεσθε ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32. Of the body of Christ during his earthly ministry Eph 2:14 (JHart, The Enmity in His Flesh: Exp. 6th ser., 3, 1901, 135–41); Hb 10:20; 1 Pt 3:18; 4:1a; 1J 4:2; 2J 7; B 5:1, 10f; 6:7, 9; 7:5; 12:10; IEph 7:2; Pol 7:1; AcPlCor 2:6b. Married couples form μία σάρξ (Gen 2:24; s. Ath. 33, 2 τὴν σάρκα πρὸς σάρκα … κοινωνίαν.—GAicher, Mann u. Weib ein Fleisch: BZ 5, 1907, 159–65) Mt 19:5f; Mk 10:8ab; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (on these passages, TBurkill, ZNW 62, ’71, 115–20). δικαιώματα σαρκός behind ‘all sorts of ceremonial washings’ there are regulations that concern the physical body Hb 9:10.—On ὑποτάγητε τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ ὡς ὁ Χριστὸς τῷ πατρὶ κατὰ σάρκα IMg 13:2 s. Hdb. ad loc. and MRackl, Die Christologie des hl. Ignatius v. Ant. 1914, 228.—πνεῦμα δυνάμεως … ὁ θεὸς … κατέπεμψεν εἰς σάρκα τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν Μαρίαν God sent a powerful spirit (prob. a ref. to the kind of divine breath that brought the first human being to life [Gen 2:7]) into flesh, that is, into Mary AcPl Ha 8, 26=BMM recto 34; s. AcPlCor 1:14.
    ⓑ as someth. with physical limitations, life here on earth (ApcEsdr 4:4 p. 28, 3 Tdf. σάρκα ἀνθρωπίνην φορῶ) θλῖψιν τῇ σαρκὶ ἕξουσιν 1 Cor 7:28. Cp. 2 Cor 4:11; Col 1:24. Of Christ τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ his body with its physical limitations Col 1:22; cp. 2:11 and s. cα below (cp. En 102:5 τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν; 1QpHab 9:2; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 29, 25).—Of human life: ἀποδημεῖν τῆς σαρκός MPol 2:2 (s. ἀποδημέω). ἐπιμένειν ἐν τῇ σαρκί Phil 1:24. ζῆν ἐν σαρκί vs. 22; Gal 2:20. ἐν ς. περιπατεῖν 2 Cor 10:3a. ἐν ς. τυγχάνειν Dg 5:8a. ὄντος ἔτι ἐν ς. σου AcPlCor 1:6. τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν ς. χρόνον 1 Pt 4:2. ἡ ἐπιδημία τῆς σαρκὸς ταύτης our sojourn in life 2 Cl 5:5. ἐν τῇ σαρκί in our earthly life 8:2.
    ⓒ as instrument of various actions or expressions.
    α. In Paul’s thought esp., all parts of the body constitute a totality known as ς. or flesh, which is dominated by sin to such a degree that wherever flesh is, all forms of sin are likew. present, and no good thing can live in the σάρξ Ro 7:18 (cp. Philo, Gig. 29 αἴτιον δὲ τῆς ἀνεπιστημοσύνης μέγιστον ἡ σὰρξ καὶ ἡ πρὸς σάρκα οἰκείωσις; Sextus 317 ἀγαθὸν ἐν σαρκὶ μὴ ἐπιζήτει. The OT lays no stress on a necessary relationship betw. flesh as a substance, and sin. But for Epicurus the σάρξ is the bearer of sinful feelings and desires as well as the means of sensual enjoyment: Ep. in Plut., Mor. 135c; 1087bf; 1089e; 1096c αἱ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐπιθυμίαι. Also Diog. L. 10, 145. Likew. Plut. himself: Mor. 101b ταῖς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡδοναῖς; 672e; 688d; 734a; Ps.-Plut., Mor. 107f σαρκὶ καὶ τοῖς πάθεσι ταύτης; Maximus Tyr. 33, 7a. Cp. 4 Macc 7:18 τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς πάθη; Philo, Deus Imm. 143 σαρκὸς ἡδονή, Gig. 29; TestJud 19:4; TestZeb 9:7; ApcMos 25 [p. 14, 2 Tdf.] εἰς τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τῆς σαρκός); Ro 6:19; 7:25 (opp. νοῦς); 8:3a, 4–9 (cp. Persius 2, 63 scelerata pulpa, which contaminates devotion to deity), 12f; Gal 5:13, 24; Col 2:23; Jd 23; AcPlCor 2:11, 15; Dg 6:5 (opp. ψυχή, as Plut., Mor. 101b). Opp. τὸ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4, 5, 6, 9, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:16, 17ab; 6:8ab; J 3:6; B 10:9. τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 25, 8) Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. σὰρξ ἁμαρτίας sinful flesh Ro 8:3b. ἐπιθυμία (τῆς) σαρκός (cp. Maximus Tyr. 20, 9f σαρκῶν … ἐπιθυμίας) Gal 5:16; 1J 2:16; B 10:9. Pl. Eph 2:3a, cp. b; 2 Pt 2:18; cp. Ro 13:14. τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός Gal 5:19 (s. Vögtle at πλεονεξία). τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3b. ὁ νοῦς τῆς σαρκός Col 2:18. τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκός the body of (sinful) flesh 2:11; cp. 1:22 and s. b above (cp. Sir 23:17 σῶμα σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ; En 102:5 τῷ σώματι τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν). τὰ τῆς σαρκός what pertains to (sinful) flesh Ro 8:5b. ἐν (τῇ) σαρκὶ εἶναι be in an unregenerate (and sinful) state Ro 7:5; 8:8f. τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί Eph 2:11a. κατὰ σάρκα εἶναι Ro 8:5a; ζῆν vs. 12b; 13; Dg 5:8b; περιπατεῖν Ro 8:4; 2 Cor 10:2; βουλεύεσθαι 1:17; στρατεύεσθαι 10:3b; cp. IRo 8:3 (opp. κατὰ γνώμην θεοῦ).
    β. source of the sexual urge. The σάρξ is the source of the sexual urge, without any suggestion of sinfulness connected w. it ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς ἐγεννήθησαν J 1:13.
    ⓓ as someth. attractive 2 Pt 2:10 (a Hebraism, cp. Judg 2:12; 3 Km 11:10; Sir 46:10). S. also 3b.
    ③ one who is or becomes a physical being, living being with flesh
    ⓐ of humans person, human being: πᾶσα σάρξ every person, everyone (LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 112, 3 [Stone p. 72]; GrBar 4:10; ApcEsdr 7:7; ApcMos 13 [p. 7, 1 Tdf.]; Mel., P. 55, 400: for כָּל-בָּשָׂר; s. πᾶς 1aα) Lk 3:6 (Is 40:5); J 17:2; Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 1 Pt 1:24 (Is 40:6); 1 Cl 59:3; 64; 2 Cl 7:6; 17:5 (the last two Is 66:24); AcPlCor 2:6a. οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ no person, nobody (En 14:21 end.—W-S. §26, 10a; B-D-F §275, 4; 302, 1; Rob. 752) Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; Ro 3:20 (cp. Ps 142:2 πᾶς ζῶν); 1 Cor 1:29 (μή); Gal 2:16.—Though ς. in the foll. passages refers to body in its physical aspect, it cannot be divorced from its conjunction with αἷμα, and the unit σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα (cp. Sir 17:31; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82]; Philo, Quis Div. Rer. Her. 57; Just., D. 135, 6) refers to a human being in contrast to God and other transcendent beings Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12 (here vice versa, αἷ. καὶ ς.). τὰ παιδία κεκοινώνηκεν αἵματος καὶ σαρκός the children share mortal nature Hb 2:14, but with suggestion of its frailty, as indicated by the context with its ref. to death. Because they are the opposites of the divine nature σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα βασιλείαν θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). For Jd 7 s. b next. Cp. AcPl Ant 13, 17 (=Aa I 237, 2) σαρκί personally (s. οἶδα 2).
    ⓑ of transcendent entities ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (RSeeberg, Festgabe AvHarnack dargebracht 1921, 263–81.—Artem. 2, 35 p. 132, 27 ἐὰν σάρκινοι οἱ θεοὶ φαίνωνται; Synes., Dio 6 p. 45b).—Of flesh other than human: ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας after another kind of flesh (cp. Judg 2:12 ὀπίσω θεῶν ἑτέρων) i.e. of divine messengers who take on ς. when they appear to humans (so Windisch et al.; difft. Frame et al. of same-sex activity) Jd 7.
    ④ human/ancestral connection, human/mortal nature, earthly descent (Did., Gen. 144, 25) Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα Ro 4:1 (Just., D. 43, 7 al.). οἱ συγγενεῖς μου κατὰ σάρκα 9:3. τοὺς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας Hb 12:9. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα the earthly Israel 1 Cor 10:18 (opp. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ Gal 6:16). Of natural descent τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός children by natural descent Ro 9:8 (opp. τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας). ὁ μὲν ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης κατὰ σάρκα γεγέννηται Gal 4:23; cp. vs. 29. μου τὴν σάρκα my compatriots Ro 11:14 (s. Gen 37:27).—Of Christ’s physical nature Ro 8:3c; Hb 5:7. Christ is descended fr. the patriarchs and fr. David (τὸ) κατὰ σάρκα according to the human side of his nature, as far as his physical descent is concerned Ro 1:3 (JDunn, Jesus: Flesh and Spirit [Ro 1:3f], JTS 24, ’73, 40–68); 9:5; 1 Cl 32:2; IEph 20:2. The context of 2 Cor 11:18 includes ancestry as a reason for boasting, but ς. in this pass. applies as well to other aspects of Paul’s career and therefore belongs more properly in 5.
    ⑤ the outward side of life as determined by normal perspectives or standards, a transf. sense of 1 and 2. Usually w. κατά indicating norm or standard σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα wise (people) according to human standards 1 Cor 1:26. καυχᾶσθαι κατὰ (τὴν) σάρκα boast of one’s outward circumstances, i.e. descent, manner of life, etc. (cp. 11:22) 2 Cor 11:18. κατὰ σάρκα Χριστόν Christ (the Messiah) from a human point of view or as far as externals are concerned 5:16b, cp. a (κατά B5bβ and 7a; also VWeber, BZ 2, 1904, 178–88; HWindisch, exc. ad loc.; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3, 374–76; FPorter, Does Paul Claim to Have Known the Historical Jesus [2 Cor 5:16]?: JBL 47, 1928, 257–75; RMoxon, CQR 108, 1929, 320–28). οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κύριοι those who, according to human standards, are masters Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. ὑμεῖς κατὰ τὴν ς. κρίνετε you judge by outward things, by externals J 8:15. Of the route taken in one’s earthly life ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ κατὰ σάρκα IRo 9:3.—ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθέναι place one’s trust in earthly things or physical advantages Phil 3:3f. εὐπροσωπῆσαι ἐν σαρκί Gal 6:12. Onesimus is a beloved brother to Philemon καὶ ἐν σαρκὶ καὶ ἐν κυρίῳ both as a human being (=personally, in the external relationship betw. master and slave) and as a Christian Phlm 16. ὑμῶν δὲ ἐν σαρκὶ ἐπισκόπῳ IEph 1:3 (cp. IMg 3:2).—HWindisch, Taufe u. Sünde 1908; EBurton, ICC Gal. 1920, 492–95; WSchauf, Sarx 1924; WBieder, Auferstehung des Fleisches od. des Leibes?: TZ 1, ’45, 105–20. W. special ref. to Paul: Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 7:14 and 8:11; Lohmeyer (ἁμαρτία 3a); EKäsemann, Leib u. Leib Christi ’33; RGrant, ATR 22, ’40, 199–203; RBultmann, Theologie des NTs ’48, 228–49 (Engl. tr. by KGrobel, ’51 I, 227–59); LMarshall, Challenge of NT Ethics ’47, 267–70; E Schweizer, Die hellenist. Komponente im NT sarx-Begriff: ZNW 48, ’57, 237–53; two in KStendahl, The Scrolls and the NT, ’57: KKuhn, 94–113 and WDavies, 157–82; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT: RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; DLys, La chair dans l’AT ’67; ASand, D. Begriff ‘Fleisch’ ’67 (Paul); RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms ’71, 49–166. On Ign.: CRichardson, The Christianity of Ign. of Ant. ’35, esp. 49 and 61. S. also the lit. s.v. πνεῦμα, end.—B. 202. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σάρξ

  • 6 τρέπω

    τρέπω, Il.8.399, etc.: [tense] fut.
    A

    τρέψω 15.261

    , etc.: [tense] aor. 1

    ἔτρεψα 18.469

    , etc., [dialect] Ep.

    τρέψα 16.645

    : besides [tense] aor. 1 Hom. has [tense] aor. 2 ἔτρᾰπον, Od.4.294, al., also Pi.O.10(11).15 (sts. also intr., v. περιτρέπω 11 and perh. Il.16.657, cf. 111 fin.): [dialect] Aeol. [tense] aor. ἔτροπον, v. ἀνατρέπω: [tense] pf.

    τέτροφα Ar.Nu. 858

    , Anaxandr.51, ([etym.] ἀνα-) S.Tr. 1009 (lyr.), And.1.131; later

    τέτρᾰφα Din.1.108

    , ([etym.] ἀνα-) ib.30, D.18.296 (cod. S), Aeschin.1.190, 3.158 (but cf. Wackernagel Studien zum griech. Perf.15);

    ἐπι-τέτραφα Plb.30.6.6

     :—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.

    τρέψομαι Hdt.1.97

    , Hp.Prog.20, E. Hipp. 1066, etc.: [tense] aor.

    ἐτρεψάμην Od.1.422

    , E.Heracl. 842: also [tense] aor. 2

    ἐτραπόμην Il.16.594

    , Hdt.2.3, al. (used also in pass. sense, ([etym.] ἀν-) Il.6.64, 14.447, and once in [dialect] Att., ([etym.] ἀν-) Pl.Cra. 395d); imper.

    τραποῦ Ar.Ra. 1248

    : [tense] pf. (v. infr.):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    τρᾰπήσομαι Plu.Nic.21

    , etc.; also

    τετράψομαι Ph.1.220

    , ([etym.] ἐπι-) Pisistr. ap. D.L.1.54: [tense] aor.

    ἐτρέφθην Hom. Epigr.14.7

    , once in Trag., E.El. 1046 (v. ἐπιτρέπω); [dialect] Ion.

    τραφθῆναι Od.15.80

    , cf. Hdt.4.12: [tense] aor. 2 ἐτράπην [pron. full] [ᾰ] A.Pers. 1029 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 416, etc.; ἐτρέπην ([etym.] ἐν-) UPZ5.24 (ii B. C.): [tense] pf.

    τέτραμμαι Pl.R. 519b

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    τετράφαται Thgn.42

    , cf. Il.2.25 ([etym.] ἐπι-); [ per.] 3sg. imper.

    τετράφθω 12.273

    ; part.

    τετραμμένος 19.212

    , etc.: [tense] plpf., [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg.

    τέτραπτο Od.4.260

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    τετράφατο Il.10.189

    .—From the [tense] aor. 2 has been formed the [tense] pres. ἐπιτρᾰπέουσι, ib. 421; cf. τραπητέον.—The [dialect] Ion. forms used by Hdt. are [tense] pres. [voice] Pass.

    τράπονται 6.33

    , al.; [ per.] 3sg. [tense] impf.

    τρέπεσκε 4.128

    ; [tense] aor. [voice] Pass.

    τραφθείς 9.56

    ; but [tense] fut. ἐπιτράψομαι is f. l. in 3.155, and in the [tense] pres. [voice] Act. and [voice] Pass. codd. vary (both forms in codd. of 2.92 ([voice] Act.),

    τρέπεται 1.117

    ,

    τράπεται 4.60

    ):—[dialect] Dor. forms, [full] τράπω EM114.19; [tense] fut.

    ἐπι-τραψῶ Schwyzer198.21

     ([place name] Crete):— turn or direct towards a thing, Hom., etc.; mostly folld. by a Prep.,

    τ. [φύσας] ἐς πῦρ Il.18.469

    ;

    ἐς ποταμὸν φλόγα 21.349

    ; εἰς εὐνὴν τράπεθ' ἥμεας show us to bed, Od.4.294 (perh. with a punning reference to ταρπώμεθα in next line);

    λέκτρονδε τραπείομεν εὐνηθέντες 8.292

     (as though τραπείομεν in Il.3.441 belonged to τρέπω and not to τέρπω; unless there is a pause after λέκτρονδε)

    ; θυμὸν εἰς ἔργον τ. Hes.Op. 316

    ;

    εἰς ἐχθροὺς βέλος A.Th. 255

    ;

    πόλεις ἐς ὕβριν Th.3.39

    ;

    τὸν ἄνθρωπον.. εἰς ἀθυμίαν D.23.194

    ;

    πρὸς ἠέλιον κεφαλήν Od.13.29

    ;

    πρὸς ὄρος πίονα μῆλα 9.315

    ;

    πρὸς εὐφροσύναν ἦτορ Pi.I.3.10

    ;

    τὰς γνώμας πρὸς χρηματισμόν Pl.Ep. 355b

    ; also

    ἐπ' ἐμπορίην θυμόν Hes.Op. 646

    , cf. Pl. Phdr. 257b, R. 508c;

    δᾶμον ἐς ἡσυχίαν Pi.P.1.70

    ;

    ἐπ' ἐχθροῖς χεῖρα S.Aj. 772

    ;

    κατὰ πληθὺν τ. θυμόν Il.5.676

    ;

    ἀντίον Ζεφύρου πρόσωπον Hes.Op. 594

    : with Advbs.,

    πάντων ὁμόσε στόματ' ἔτραπε Il.12.24

    ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ὅποι χρὴ.. τ. ἔπος S.Ph. 897

    ;

    ἐνταῦθα σὴν φρένα E.IT 1322

    ; τὴν

    διάνοιαν ἄλλοσε Pl.R. 393a

    ;

    ἐκεῖσε τ. τὰς ἡδονάς Id.Lg. 643c

    ;

    ἐπὶ τὴν θεραπείαν τὸν λόγον Sor.2.23

    : c. inf., σέ.. ἔτραπε.. ὀργὰ παρφάμεν led thee to speak crookedly, Pi.P.9.43:—also in [voice] Med.,

    τραπέσθαι τινὰ ἐπί τι Pl.Euthd. 303c

    , cf. Chrm. 156c:—[voice] Pass.,

    κεῖται ἀνὰ πρόθυρον τετραμμένος Il.19.212

    .
    2 [voice] Pass. and [voice] Med., turn one's steps, turn in a certain direction,

    τραφθῆναι ἀν' Ἑλλάδα Od.15.80

    ;

    τραφθέντες ἐς τὸ πεδίον Hdt. 9.56

    ;

    ἐς Θήβας ἐτραπόμην Id.2.3

    ; ἐπὶ Προκόννησον, ἐπ' Ἀθηνέων, Id 6.33, 5.57: with Advbs., ἀμηχανεῖν ὅποι τράποιντο which way to turn, A. Pers. 459;

    ἀμηχανῶ.. ὅπᾳ τράπωμαι Id.Ag. 1532

     (lyr.);

    πᾷ τις τράποιτ' ἄν; Id.Ch. 409

     (lyr.);

    ποῖ τρέψομαι; E.Hipp. 1066

    , cf. X.An.3.5.13;

    ποῖ χρὴ τραπέσθαι; Lys.29.2

    : c. acc. cogn., τραπέσθαι ὁδόν take a course, Hdt.1.11, cf. 9.69, Pl.Sph. 242b;

    πολλὰς ὁδοὺς τραπόμενοι κατὰ ὄρη Th.5.10

    ;

    ἐτρέφθην ἥνπερ ἦν πορεύσιμον E.El. 1046

    .
    3 in [voice] Pass. and [voice] Med. also, turn or betake oneself, εἰς ὀρχηστύν, εἰς ἀοιδήν, Od.1.422, 18.305;

    ἐπὶ ἔργα Il.3.422

    , etc.; ἐπ' ἀναιδείην Hom Epigr.14.7;

    ἐπὶ σωφροσύνην Thgn.379

    ;

    ἐπὶ ψευδέα ὁδόν Hdt.1.117

    ;

    ἐπὶ φροντίδας E.IA 646

    ;

    ἐφ' ἁρπαγήν Th.4.104

    ;

    ἐπ' εἰρήνην X.HG4.4.2

    ;

    ἐς τὸ μαίνεσθαι S.OC 1537

    ;

    ἐς ἀλκήν Th.2.84

    ;

    εἰς ἁρπαγὴν ἐπὶ τὰς οἰκίας X.HG6.5.30

    ;

    κατὰ θέαν τετραμμένοι Th.5.9

    ;

    πρὸς ἀλκήν Hdt.3.78

    ;

    πρὸς τὸ κέρδιον τραπείς S.Aj. 743

    ;

    πρὸς λῃστείαν Th.1.5

    ;

    πρὸς ἄριστον τετρ. Hdt.1.63

    ;

    πρὸς τὸν πότον Pl.Smp. 176a

    , etc.; also τ. πρός τινα betake oneself, have recourse to him, Cratin.152, X.An.4.5.30, Pl.Prt. 339e;

    ἐφ' ἱκετείαν τ. τῶν διωκόντων Id.Ap. 39a

    .
    4 [voice] Pass. and [voice] Med., of places, to be turned or look in a certain direction,

    πρὸς ζόφον Od. 12.81

    ; πρὸς ἄρκτον, πρὸς νότον, etc., Hdt. 1.148, Th.2.15, etc.; also

    πρὸς τοῦ Τμώλου Hdt.1.84

    ; ἄντ' ἠελίου τετρ. straight towards, Hes. Op. 727.
    II turn, i. e. turn round or about, πάλιν τρέπειν turn back,

    ἵππους Il.8.432

    ; τινα ib. 399; ὄσσε, δόρυ, 21.415, 20.439; τὰ καλὰ τ. ἔξω turn the best side outmost, show the best side (of a garment), Pi.P.3.83:—[voice] Pass.,

    πάλιν ἐτράπετ' Il.21.468

    ;

    μή τις ὀπίσσω τετράφθω 12.273

    ; c. gen., turn from..,

    υἷος 18.138

    ; ἐτράπετ' αἰχμή the point bent back, like ἀνεγνάμφθη, 11.237; of the sun having passed the meridian,

    πόστην ἥλιος τέτραπται; Ar.Fr. 163

    , cf. Antig. Mir.60; also of the solstice, ἐπειδὰν ἐν χειμῶνι τράπηται [ὁ ἥλιος] (v.

    τροπή 1

    ) X.Mem.4.3.8, cf. Pl.Lg. 915d;

    τραπείσης τῆς ὥρας Arist. HA 628b26

    :—intr. in [voice] Act., περὶ δ' ἔτραπον ὧραι, v. περιτρέπω 11.
    2 τ. τι εἴς τινα turn upon another's head, τ. τὴν αἰτίαν, τὴν ὀργὴν εἴς τινα, Is.8.41, D.8.57; freq. in imprecations, ἐς κεφαλὴν τράποιτ' ἐμοί on my head be it! Ar.Ach. 833, cf. Hdt.2.39; εἰς σεαυτὸν τρεπέσθω on your head be it! IG4.444 ([place name] Phlius);

    ἦ κἀπ' ἐμοὶ τρέποιτ' ἂν αἰτίας τέλος; A.Eu. 434

    ;

    κατὰ σεαυτόν νυν τρέπου

     keep your ills to yourself,

    Ar.Ach. 1019

    , Nu. 1263;

    πρὸς ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς τρέψεσθε Lys.8.19

    .
    3 alter, change,

    φρένας Il.6.61

    ;

    τὰς γνώμας X.An.3.1.41

    ; [τὸ χρῶμα] Sor.1.35; [ τὸ γάλα] ib.92;

    ἔτραπεν κεῖνον μισθῷ χρυσός Pi.P.3.55

    ; deceive, Archil.166;

    ἐς κακὸν τ. τινά Pi.P.3.35

    ;

    ἅττ' ἂν ὑμεῖς ἐξαμάρτητ' ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον τρέπειν Ar.Nu. 589

     (troch.);

    ἐς γέλων τὸ πρᾶγμ' ἔτρεψας Id.V. 1261

    , cf. Hdt.7.105, etc.: [voice] Med., πρὸς τὰς ξυμφορὰς τὰς γνώμας τρέπεσθαι shift their views, Th.1.140, cf. Plu. 2.71e, etc.:—[voice] Pass., to be changed,

    τρέπεται χρώς Il.13.279

    , cf. Od. 21.413, Hes.Op. 416; τὴν χρόαν τρέπεσθαι, of animals, Plu.2.51d; τῷ χρώματι τρεπομένας, of women, Sor.1.35 (so abs., of a man, Id.Vit.Hippocr.5);

    ὁ οὕτω τρεπόμενος σφυγμός Gal.18(2).40

    ;

    τρέπεται νόος Od.3.147

    ;

    νόος ἐτράπετ' 7.263

    ;

    Διὸς ἐτράπετο φρήν Il.10.45

    ;

    τράπομαι καὶ τὴν γνώμην μετατίθεμαι Hdt.7.18

    ; ὁρῶν αὐτοὺς τετραμμένους seeing that they had changed their minds, Id.9.34, cf. Th.4.106;

    ἐπὶ τὰ βελτίω τρέπου Ar.V. 986

    : c. inf.,

    κραδίη τέτραπτο νέεσθαι Od.4.260

    ;

    ἐτράποντο.. τῷ δήμῳ.. τὰ πράγματα ἐνδιδόναι Th. 2.65

    : c. acc. cogn.,

    πλείους τραπόμενος τροπὰς τοῦ Εὐρίπου Aeschin. 3.90

    ; οἶνος τρέπεται the wine turns, becomes sour (v. τροπίας), S.E. P.1.41;

    ἡ ξανθὴ χολὴ.. εἰς τὸν ἰώδη τρέπεται χυμόν Gal.16.534

    ; ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἐπὶ τὸ κομψότερον ἐτράπη has taken a turn for the better, POxy.935.5 (iii A. D.); ἐπὶ τὸ ῥᾷον ἔδοξεν τετράφθαι ib.939.17 (iv A. D.); τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν εἰς ἄπορον τραπέντος having become destitute, PMeyer 8.14 (ii A. D.):—intr. in [voice] Act.,

    τοῦ ἄρχοντος τρέποντος εἰς δεσπότην Ph.2.562

    .
    III turn or put to flight, rout, defeat,

    τρέψω δ' ἥρωας Ἀχαιούς Il.15.261

    ;

    ἔτρεψε φάλαγγας Tyrt.12.21

    , cf. Pi.O.10 (11).15, Hdt.1.63, 4.128, Th.1.62, 4.25,33, etc.; in full,

    φύγαδε τ. Il.8.157

    ;

    εἰς φυγὴν ἔτρεψε τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους X.An.1.8.24

    ;

    τρέψαι καὶ ἐς φυγὴν καταστῆσαι Th.7.43

     (but

    ἔτρεψαν ἐς φυγὴν πόδα

     they fled,

    E.Supp. 718

    ):—[voice] Med., [tense] pres., X.An.5.4.16, J.AJ13.2.4, Plu.Cam.29: [tense] fut., Ar.Eq. 275 (troch.): [tense] aor. 1, E.Heracl. 842, X.An.6.1.13:—[voice] Pass., to be put to flight, [tense] aor. 2

    ἐτράπην A.Pers. 1029

     (lyr.), X.Cyr.5.4.7 (v.l. ἐτράποντο), etc.: also [tense] aor. 1

    ἐτρέφθην Id.An.5.4.23

    , HG3.4.14, Cyn.12.5: [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Med.

    ἐτραπόμην Hdt.1.80

    , 9.63, etc.;

    ἐς φυγὴν τραπέσθαι Id.8.91

    , Th.8.95;

    τραπόμενοι κατέφυγον Id.4

     54;

    φυγῇ ἄλλος ἄλλῃ ἐτράπετο X.An.4.8.19

    ;

    ἐτράποντο φεύγειν Plu.Lys. 28

    , Caes.45: rarely in [tense] pf. [voice] Pass.,

    τετραμμένου φυγᾷ γένους A.Th. 952

     (lyr.):—also intr. in [voice] Act.,

    φύγαδ' ἔτραπε Il.16.657

     (unless it governs δίφρον).
    IV turn away, keep off,

    οὐκ ἄν με τρέψειαν ὅσοι θεοί εἰσ' ἐν Ὀλύμπῳ 8.451

    ;

    τ. τινὰ ἀπὸ τείχεος 22.16

    ;

    ἑκάς τινος Od.17.73

     ([voice] Med.);

    τῇ.. νόον ἔτραπεν 19.479

    : abs.,

    ἀλλὰ Ζεὺς ἔτρεψε Il.4.381

    ; of weapons,

    βέλος.. ἔτραπεν ἄλλῃ 5.187

    ;

    ἀπὸ ἔγχεος ὁρμὴν ἔτραπε Hes. Sc. 456

    .
    V overturn,

    εὐτυχοῦντα μὲν σκιά τις ἂν τρέψειεν A.Ag. 1328

     (s. v.l.);

    τ. ἄνω κάτω Id.Fr. 311

    .
    VI turn, apply,

    τ. τι ἐς ἄλλο τι Hdt.2.92

    ; τὰς ἐμβάδας ποῖ τέτροφας; what have you done with your shoes? Ar.Nu. 858;

    τὸν μόναυλον ποῖ τέτροφας; Anaxandr. 51

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    ποῖ τρέπεται.. τὰ χρήματα; Ar.V. 665

     (anap.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τρέπω

  • 7 μαρτυρέω

    μαρτυρέω impf. ἐμαρτύρουν; fut. μαρτυρήσω; 1 aor. ἐμαρτύρησα; pf. μεμαρτύρηκα. Pass.: impf. ἐμαρτυρούμην; 1 aor. ἐμαρτυρήθην Hb 11:2, 4, 39; pf. μεμαρτύρημαι (s. four next entries; Semonides, Hdt.+)
    ① to confirm or attest someth. on the basis of personal knowledge or belief, bear witness, be a witness.
    ⓐ to offer testimony
    α. act. ὑμεῖς μαρτυρεῖτε you are witnesses J 15:27. ἐὰν θέλωσιν μαρτυρεῖν if they are willing to appear as witnesses Ac 26:5.—J 12:17; 1J 5:6f. Parenthetically, emphasizing the correctness of a statement, μαρτυρῶ I can testify (POxy 105, 13 Σαραπίων μαρτυρῶ=‘I, S., am witness’; PLond III, 1164 [f], 35 al. p. 162.—B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434) 2 Cor 8:3. περί τινος bear witness, testify concerning someone or someth. (PGrenf II, 73, 16 ὅταν ἔλθῃ σὺν θεῷ, μαρτυρήσει σοι περὶ ὧν αὐτὴν πεποιήκασιν; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 217, Vi. 259) J 1:7f, 15 (in the very likely case that μαρτυρεῖ refers to the past, cp. Caecil. Calact., Fgm. 75 p. 58, 2ff, where examples are given of the interchange of tenses: Demosth. 59, 34 τοὺς ὁρῶντας for τ. ἑωρακότας; Eur., Androm. Fgm. 145 Nauck2 ὁρῶ ἀντὶ τοῦ εἶδον; Thu. 2, 35, 1 ἐπαινοῦσι ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπῄνεσαν); 2:25; 5:31, 32a, 36f, 39; 7:7; 8:13f, 18ab; 10:25; 15:26; 21:24; 1J 5:9. μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ testify to the wrong J 18:23 (μ.=furnish proof X., Symp. 8, 12). Also ἐπί τινι Hb 11:4b (on ἐπί w. dat. in this pass. s. Gen 4:4). W. dat. of thing (Jos., Ant. 12, 135; Ath. 16, 3 τῷ λόγω. Πλάτων) μ. τῇ ἀληθείᾳ bear witness to the truth J 5:33; 18:37. μ. σου τῇ ἀληθείᾳ testify to the truth of your (way of life) 3J 3; σου τῇ ἀγάπῃ vs. 6. W. dat. of pers. about whom testimony is given (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 73 §298; Just., D. 122, 2.—It is dat. of advantage or disadv.) Ac 10:43; 22:5; GJs 15:2; w. ptc. foll. (μ. Ἰακὼβ λέγων Did., Gen. 221, 2) θεὸς ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς δοὺς κτλ. God testified for them by giving Ac 15:8 (though αὐτοῖς can also be taken w. δούς); w. ὅτι foll. bear someone witness that J 3:28; Ro 10:2; Gal 4:15; Col 4:13. μ. ἑαυτῷ, ὅτι bear witness to oneself that Mt 23:31. The dat. can also designate the pers. who is informed or instructed by the testimony: bear witness to someone Hb 10:15; Rv 22:18.—μ. ὅτι testify that (Aelian, VH 9, 11; Did., Gen. 156, 28) J 1:34; 4:44; 12:17 v.l.; 1J 4:14. ὅτι introducing direct discourse J 4:39. μ. κατὰ τ. θεοῦ ὅτι bear witness against God by declaring that 1 Cor 15:15 (PPetr II, 21 [d], 12 [III B.C.] καθʼ οὗ μαρτυρῶ). ἐμαρτύρησεν καὶ εἶπεν w. direct discourse foll. J 13:21. μ. λέγων w. direct disc. foll. J 1:32. Of God μοι μαρτυρεῖ λέγων (Ps 89:4 follows) he testifies (of it) to me by saying 15:4. For 1 Ti 6:13 s. c below.
    β. pass., be witnessed, have witness borne ὑπό τινος by someone (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 46 σοφία μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ θεοῦ; Just., D. 63, 5 Χριστὸς ὑπὸ τοῦ ταῦτα ποιήσαντος μαρτυρούμενος. Of Jesus: ὑπὸ τῶν προφητῶν πολλαχοῦ μεμαρτ. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 9, 30) Ro 3:21 (the witness of the law and prophets points to God’s righteousness). Foll. by ὅτι and a quot. in direct discourse Hb 7:17. μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ one of whom it is testified that he lives vs. 8.
    ⓑ to confirm bear witness to, declare, confirm, act. (Eunap., Vi. Soph. p. 76 ὁ θεὸς ἐμαρτύρησε; Iren. 2, 22, 5 [Harv I 331, 1]) τὶ someth. (Demosth. 57, 4 ἀκοήν; Aeschin. 1, 46 τἀληθῆ). ὸ̔ ἑωράκαμεν μαρτυροῦμεν J 3:11; cp. vs. 32. τὸν λόγον τ. θεοῦ Rv 1:2. ταῦτα 22:20. τινί τὶ someth. to or for someone (Dionys. Hal. 3, 67, 1; Jos., Ant. 6, 355) vs. 16. ὑμῖν τ. ζωήν 1J 1:2. The acc. is to be supplied fr. the context J 19:35; Ac 23:11. W. ptc. ἀκούσαντες μαρτυρήσωσιν they must admit that they have heard PtK 3 p. 15, 23.—μαρτυρίαν μ. bear witness, confirm, attest (Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 399b; Epict. 4, 8, 32) περί τινος concerning someone J 5:32b; 1J 5:10 (POxy 3313, 25f μαρτυρήσει σοι Σαραπᾶς περὶ τῶν ῥόδων S. will confirm to you about the roses).
    ⓒ to support one’s testimony with total selfgiving, eccl. usage w. regard to martyrdom bear witness, testify, be a witness (unto death), be martyred, act. (TestAbr B 11 p. 115, 16 [Stone p. 787] Ἄβελ ὁ ἐν πρώτοις μαρτυρήσας; Mel., HE 4, 26, 3; τοῖς μαρτυρούσι τῷ χριστιανισμῷ μέχρι θανάτου Orig., C. Cels. 1, 8, 2): of Paul μαρτυρήσας ἐπὶ τῶν ἡγουμένων … εἰς τὸν ἅγιον τόπον ἐπορεύθη 1 Cl 5:7; cp. vs. 4; MPol 1:1; 19:1; 21f (Iren. 3, 3, 4 [Harv. II 12, 8]); EpilMosq 4. Prob. 1 Ti 6:13 also belongs here: Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ μαρτυρήσαντος ἐπὶ Ποντίου Πιλάτου τ. καλὴν ὁμολογίαν Christ Jesus, who made the good confession before Pontius Pilate (s. GBaldensperger, RHPR 2, 1922, 1–25; 95–117); otherwise the passage may be classed under a above.
    ② to affirm in a supportive manner, testify favorably, speak well (of), approve
    ⓐ act. (Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 19; SIG 374, 37 [III B.C.]; POxy 930, 16) w. dat. of the pers. (Appian, Samn. 11, §2 τοῖς ὑπάτοις, Liby. 105 §495, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §387; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jos., Ant. 12, 134) or of the thing approved Lk 4:22 (OFearghus, ZNW 75, ’84, 60–72 [pap and ins]; JNolland, JBL 98, ’79, 219–29); J 3:26. Of God toward David Ac 13:22. μὴ ἑαυτῷ μαρτυρείτω he must not testify (favorably) concerning himself 1 Cl 38:2. W. dat. to be supplied 3J 12b. μαρτυρίᾳ, ᾗ ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτῷ ὁ δεσπότης Hs 5, 2, 6. Of the flesh ἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα … μαρτυρήσῃ αὐτῇ Hs 5, 7, 1.—ὁ κύριος ὁ μαρτυρῶν ἐπὶ (which a v.l. omits; μ. ἐπί τινι as Jos., Ant. 3, 189) τῷ λόγῳ τ. χάριτος αὐτοῦ the Lord, who attested the word of his grace Ac 14:3. With συνευδοκέω Lk 11:48 v.l.
    ⓑ pass., be well spoken of, be approved (Ep. 12 of Apollonius of Tyana: Philostrat. I 348, 26; Just., D. 29, 1. Exx. fr. ins in Dssm., NB 93 [BS 265], LO 69, 2 [LAE 84, 5]) ἀνὴρ μαρτυρούμενος or μεμαρτυρημένος a man of good reputation Ac 6:3; IPhld 11:1. Of OT worthies people of attested merit 1 Cl 17:1; 19:1. Of David 18:1. Of Abraham μεγάλως ἐμαρτυρήθη his merit was gloriously attested 17:2 (cp. Just., D. 11, 5 ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει μαρτυηθέντος ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ). Of the apostles 47:4. Of Paul IEph 12:2. Of church leaders 1 Cl 44:3.—Foll. by nom. and inf. Hb 11:4a; cp. vs. 5. διά τινος be praised for someth. 11:4a, 39. ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς μαρτυρούμενος well attested in good deeds 1 Ti 5:10; cp. Hb 11:2. ὑπό τινος be well spoken of by someone (M. Ant. 7, 62; SIG 799, 28; Jos., Ant. 3, 59; Just., D. 29, 3; 92, 4; New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 10 of a benefactor) Ac 10:22; 16:2; 22:12; IPhld 5:2.—Impersonally μαρτυρεῖταί τινι ὑπό τινος a good testimony is given by someone to someone (Dionys. Hal., Thu. 8 μαρτυρεῖται τῷ ἀνδρὶ τάχα μὲν ὐπὸ πάντων φιλοσόφων; BGU 1141, 15 [14 B.C.] ὡς καὶ μαρτυρηθήσεταί σοι ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων) Δημητρίῳ μεμαρτύρηται ὑπὸ πάντων καὶ ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας Demetrius has received a good testimony from everyone and from the truth itself 3J 12a.—Dg 12:6.—OMichel, Bibl. Bekennen u. Bezeugen, Ὁμολογεῖν und μαρτυρεῖν im bibl. Sprachgebr.: Evang. Theologie 2, ’35, 231–45; EBurnier, La notion de témoignage dans le NT ’39.—DELG s.v. μάρτυς. M-M. EDNT. TRE XXII 196–212. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μαρτυρέω

  • 8 προσάγω

    προσάγω [ᾰ], [tense] aor. 2 προσήγᾰγον: for [tense] aor. 1 προσῆξα v. infr. A.11.3 fin.: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. (in pass. sense), Th.4.115: once [full] ποσάγω (q.v.):—
    A bring to or upon,

    τίς δαίμων τόδε πῆμα προσήγαγε; Od.17.446

    , cf. E. Med. 993 (lyr.);

    π. δῶρά τινι h.Ap. 272

    ;

    ἄστει κόσμον Pi.I.6(5).69

    ;

    θυσίας τινί Hdt.3.24

    ;

    βοσκήματα S.Tr. 762

    ;

    τῳ θεῶν ὕμνους ἢ χορείας Pl.Lg. 799b

    ;

    ἱερεῖα τοῖς βωμοῖς Poll.1.27

    ;

    ποταγόντω.. τὰ ἱερεῖα.. ποτὶ τὸν βωμόν SIG1010

     ([place name] Chalcedon);

    π. πάντα ἱκανά

     furnish, supply,

    X.Cyr.5.2.5

    ; ἁρμαμάξας ib.4.3.1;

    λίθους PCair.Zen.34.13

     (iii B. C.).
    2 put to, add, ἅμα ἠγόρευε καὶ ἔργον προσῆγε (v.l. προῆγεν) Hdt.9.92; of exercises and food,

    ἐξ ὀλίγου π. Hp.Insomn.89

    ; cf.

    προσαγωγή 11.5

    .
    3 bring to, move towards, apply,

    τὴν ἄνω γνάθον π. τῇ κάτω Hdt.2.68

    ; μὴ π. τὴν χεῖρά μοι lay it not on me, Ar. Lys. 893; π. κεγχρώμασιν ὀφθαλμόν apply it closely, E.Ph. 1386;

    π. τὴν ῥῖνά τινι Diod.Com.2.39

    ;

    πρὸς τὸ στόμα τὰς χεῖρας Arist.HA 587a27

    : esp. of medical applications,

    ἤπια [ἰήματα] μετὰ τὰ ἰσχυρά Hdt.3.130

    ;

    προσαχθέντος φαρμάκου Orib.46.1.125

    : metaph., [

    παιδιὰς] π. φαρμακείας χάριν Arist.Pol. 1337b41

    ;

    παρρησίαν καὶ δηγμὸν ἀνθρώπῳ δυστυχοῦντι Plu.2.69a

    .
    4 of meats, etc., set before,

    βρώματά τινι X.Cyr.1.3.4

    , cf. Plu.2.126a, etc.
    5 metaph., π. ὅρκους σφι put oaths to them, make them take oaths, Hdt.6.74.
    6 in military sense, bring up for the attack, move on towards,

    π. πύλαις λόχον E.Ph. 1104

    ;

    τῇ Ποτειδαίᾳ τὸν στρατόν Th.1.64

    ;

    τὸ στράτευμα ἀντίπρῳρον π. X.HG7.5.23

    ; [

    στρατιὰν] π. πρὸς πολεμίους Id.Cyr.1.6.43

    ; v. infr. 11: so also

    π. μηχανὰς πόλει Th.2.76

    , cf. X.HG2.4.27, etc.; μηχανῆς μελλούσης προσάξεσθαι (in pass. sense) Th.4.115; π. βίαν τοῖς τείχεσι, τῇ πόλει, etc., D.S.11.32, 12.46, etc.
    7 metaph.,

    π. βίαν τοῖς πολεμίοις Id.15.68

    , cf. PTeb.61 (b).33 (ii B.C., [voice] Pass.), etc.;

    τὰς ἀνάγκας Th.1.99

    ;

    συκοφαντίαν π. τοῖς πράγμασι D.19.98

    ; δεινὰν π. τόλμαν apply or put forth daring, E.Med. 859 (lyr.); γράψας.. τίνα οἰκονομίαν προσαγήγοχας what steps you have taken, PCair.Zen.240.10 (iii B. C.);

    πολλῶν φόβων προσαγομένων X.An.4.1.23

    ;

    π. ἡδονάς Pl.Lg. 798e

    .
    8 bring to or before,

    τῷ Κύρῳ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους X.Cyr.3.2.12

    , cf. HG3.4.8, etc.; bring in, bring with one, Is.8.16; introduce,

    πρὸς τὸν δῆμον Th.5.61

    ;

    πρὸς τὴν βουλήν And.1.111

    , cf. Lys.6.29; π. τοὺς πρέσβεις (i. e. before the assembly) D.18.28, cf. 213;

    πρεσβείαν ἐλθοῦσαν π. πρὸς βουλὴν καὶ δῆμον IG12.39.12

    ; introduce at court, X.Cyr.1.3.8; bring a person into a law-court as defendant or as witness, PHal.8.5 (iii B. C.), etc.
    b introduce in writing, λόγῳ π. ὅτι.. introduce the statement.., Arist.Cael. 304a13;

    π. [ἡλικίαν] πρὸς μάθησιν Id.Pol. 1336a24

    ; [

    παιδάριον] π. πρὸς τὰ μαθήματα PSI4.340.24

     (iii B. C.);

    τὰ λοιπὰ μυθικῶς προσῆκται

     have been introduced,

    Arist.Metaph. 1074b4

    .
    9 bring hither, lead on,

    τίς [σε] προσήγαγεν χρεία; S.Ph. 236

    ;

    ἐλπίς μ' ἀεὶ προσῆγε E.Andr.27

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    οἴκτῳ καὶ ἐπιεικείᾳ π. Th.3.48

    ; βίᾳ ib.95; ἄκοντες π. ὑπ' Ἀθηναίων ib. 63, cf. X.HG6.1.7.
    10 [voice] Pass., to be brought over, attached to the cause of, c. dat.,

    εἴ πως σφίσιν προσαχθείη Th.2.77

    : abs.,

    προσήγεσθε ὑπ' Ἀθηναίων Id.3.63

    ; cf. B.1.
    12 = προσαγγέλλω, announce, report, PTeb.60.69 (ii B. C.), etc.
    13 debit a person with an amount, charge it to him,

    συνέβη ναῦλον ἡμῖν προσάγεσθαι τοῦ πλοίου PCair.Zen.368.28

    , cf. 326.16 (iii B. C.).
    II seemingly intr. (sc. ἑαυτόν, στρατόν, etc.), draw near, approach, X.HG3.5.22;

    πρός τινας LXX 3 Ki.18.21

    ; esp. in a hostile sense, advance against, attack,

    π. πρὸς τὸ κέρας X.An.1.10.9

    , etc.;

    κώμῃ τινί Arr.An.2.3.4

    ;

    δι' ἀπάτης τοῖς βασιλεῦσι Plu.2.800a

    ;

    ἐγγυτέρω ταῖς ἐλπίσιν Id.Galb.9

    ; τοῖς τετταράκοντα [ἔτεσι] Id.Pomp.46; πόταγε ([dialect] Dor. for πρόσαγε) come on! Theoc.1.62, 15.78; μαλακῶς π. [γυναικί] make advances to a woman in an effeminate manner, Plu.2.240e; of Time, τῆς προσαγούσης τρύγης the approaching vintage, Sammelb.5810.16 (iv A.D.).
    2 (sc. ναῦν) bring to, come to land,

    τόποις Plb.1.54.5

    , etc.;

    Ῥόδῳ Apollod.2.1.4c

    odd.
    B [voice] Med., bring or draw to oneself, attach to oneself, bring over to one's side,

    σοφίῃ αὐτούς, οὐκ ἀγνωμοσύνῃ προσηγάγετο Hdt.2.172

    ;

    ἀνάγκῃ προσάγεσθαί τινα Id.6.25

    , cf. Th.1.99;

    τἀρετῇ π. πόσιν E. Andr. 226

    ;

    ἀπάτῃ π. τὸ πλῆθος Th.3.43

    ;

    χρήμασι καὶ δωρεαῖς τὸν δῆμον προσάγεσθαι Pl.Lg. 695d

    ;

    τῷ ποιεῖν εὖ π. τὰς πόλεις Isoc.4.80

    ;

    θεραπείαις Id.3.22

    ; so [

    ἵππον] ἠρεμαίως π. τῷ χαλινῷ X.Eq.9.5

    ;

    συμμάχους καὶ βοηθοὺς π. Id.Mem.3.4.9

    ;

    τὴν τῶν Ἀθηναίων ξυμμαχίαν Th.5.82

    ; πάντων π. ὄμματα draw all eyes upon oneself, X.Smp.1.9.
    2 abs., draw to oneself, embrace, Ar.Av. 141, X.Cyr.7.5.39, Pl.R. 439b;

    ἥ γ' ἐμὴν γενειάδα προσήγετ' ἀεὶ στόματι E.Supp. 1100

    .
    3 c. inf., ἡ Σφὶγξ τὸ πρὸς ποσὶ σκοπεῖν.. ἡμᾶς.. προσήγετο put us upon considering, S.OT 131; προσάξομαι δάμαρτ' ἐᾶν σε .. will induce her to suffer thee.., E. Ion 659.
    II take to oneself, take up,

    ὀστᾶ Id.Supp. 949

    ;

    τὰ ναυάγια Th.8.106

    .
    2 get for oneself, procure, import,

    ὧν δεῖται X.Vect.1.7

    ; τὰ προσαχθέντα imports, ib.4.18.
    3 αἷς [ταῖς προβοσκίσι] π. εἰς τὸ στόμα τὴν τροφήν with which they bring it to their mouths, Arist.HA 523b31, cf. 526a28, PA 685b10.
    4 μηδὲ προσάγου τῷ πράγματι χειμῶνας ἑτέρους do not add further troubles, Men.187; π. τὸν χρόνον καὶ τὸν πόνον employ it for one's own advantage, Plb.29.17.4.
    5 μάρτυρα π. cite as witness, Plu.2.1049b.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προσάγω

  • 9 ἐν

    ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.
    ① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)
    ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.
    ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.
    ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.
    ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.
    ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).
    ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.
    ② marker of a state or condition, in
    ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.
    ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.
    ③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.
    ④ marker of close association within a limit, in
    ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.
    ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.
    ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.
    ⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).
    ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’
    α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).
    β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.
    ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).
    ⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).
    ⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.
    ⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.
    ⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)
    ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.
    ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.
    ⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when
    ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.
    ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.
    ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.
    ⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.
    ⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

  • 10 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    ① be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.—There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    ② to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    ⓐ gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    ⓑ to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    ⓒ in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    ③ be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    ⓐ of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    ⓑ involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    ⓒ of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    ⓓ of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    ④ to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    ⑤ to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    ⑥ to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8.— Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    ⑦ to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    ⑧ to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    ⑨ to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    ⑩ to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    ⑪ as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    ⓐ (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    ⓑ w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    ⓒ w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    ⓓ Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    ⓔ In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    ⓕ to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

  • 11 εἰ

    1
    εἰ (Hom.+)
    ① marker of a condition, existing in fact or hypothetical, if (B-D-F §371f, neg. §428, 1; 2; Rob., indexes; JBoyer, Grace Theological Journal 2, ’81, 75–141, marker of a ‘simple, logical connection between protasis and apodosis’).
    ⓐ w. the indic.
    α. in all tenses, to express a condition thought of as real or to denote assumptions relating to what has already happened εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ if you really are the Son of God Mt 4:3; sim. 5:29f; 6:23; 8:31; Ac 5:39. εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ if you call yourself a Judean Ro 2:17. εἰ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ βαστάζεις if you do boast, (remember) you do not support 11:18 al. In Paul the verb is freq. missing, and is to be supplied fr. the context: εἰ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν (sc. ἐστιν), τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρόν (sc. ἐστιν) 8:10. εἰ τέκνα (sc. ἐστέ) if you are children, then … vs. 17, εἰ χάριτι (γέγονεν), οὐκέτι ἐξ ἔργων 11:6 al. The negative in clauses where the reality of the condition is taken for granted is οὐ (earlier Gk. μή [for exception s. Goodwin p. 138f]; s. B-D-F §428, 1): εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν Mt 26:42. εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε Mk 11:25 [26] v.l. εἰ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε Lk 16:11f; εἰ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν vs. 31. εἰ οὐ φοβοῦμαι Lk 18:4; cp. J 5:47; 10:37; Ro 8:9; 11:21; 1 Cor 7:9; 9:2; 11:6; 15:13ff, 29, 32; 16:22 al. εἰ is rarely found w. the future εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται Mt 26:33; Mk 14:29; εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 2 Ti 2:12 (cp. Just., A I, 31, 6 εἰ μὴ ἀρνοῖντο Ἰησοῦν); εἰ ὑπομενεῖτε 1 Pt 2:20; εἰ καὶ οὐ δώσει (class. ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δῷ B-D-F §372, 3; Rob. 1012) Lk 11:8. W. aor., when events are regarded as having taken place Mt 24:22; Mk 3:26; 13:20.
    β. w. the pres., impf., aor., or plpf. indic. to express an unreal (contrary to fact) condition (B-D-F §360; 372; Rob. 1012ff). ἄν is usu. found in the apodosis (regularly in class.) εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σίδωνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν μετενόησαν if the wonders had been done in T. and S., they would have repented long ago Mt 11:21. εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers 23:30. εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης if the master of the house had known 24:43 (cp. Just., A I, 12, 2 εἰ … ταῦτα ἐγίνωσκον; 18, 1 al.) εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would know Lk 7:39 al. The pres. indic. εἰ ἔχετε (v.l. εἴχετε) πίστιν … ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith … you would say Lk 17:6. Somet. ἄν is lacking in the apodosis (Polyaenus 2, 3, 5 εἰ ἐπεποιήκειμεν … νῦν ἐχρῆν=if we had done … it would have been necessary; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 16, 18 [II B.C.]; PRein I, 7 [II B.C.]; POxy 526, 10; 530, 8 and 17; Just., A I, 10, 6; 11:2 al.—PMelcher, De sermone Epict., diss. Halle 1905, 75; Mlt. 200f) εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο if this man were not from God, he would not have been able to … J 9:33. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν if I had not come, they would not have sin 15:22; cp. vs. 24. W. the apodosis placed first Mk 9:42 (v.l. περιέκειτο), Lk 17:2; J 19:11.
    ⓑ εἰ w. subj., as καὶ εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 (s. 7 below), is unusual, perh. a textual error; B-D-F §372, 3 conjectures κἄν for καὶ εἰ. But εἰ w. subj. is found in the older poets and Hdt. (Kühner-G. II 474), in Aristoph., Equ. 698 et al., in var. dialects (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I 1912, 277f) and in later times (e.g. Epict., Vett. Val., Lucian [ed. CJacobitz, Index graec. 473a]; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. p. 84, 28; 197, 9; ins [Rdm.2 199]; PRyl 234, 12; POxy 496, 11; Dt 8:5); B-D-F §372, 3; Mlt. 187; Reinhold 107; OSchulthess, AKaegi Festschr. 1919, 161f.
    ⓒ εἰ w. the optative is rare: εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε … μακάριοι even if you should suffer, … you would be blessed 1 Pt 3:14. εἰ θέλοι (v.l. θέλει) τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ if it should be God’s will vs. 17. εἴ τι ἔχοιεν (sc. κατηγορεῖν; cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 εἰ … μηδὲν ἔχοι τις ἐλέγχειν) πρὸς ἐμέ if they should have any charges to bring against me Ac 24:19. εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη (Jos., Ant. 12, 12) if it should be possible 20:16 (but s. B-D-F §385, 2; Just., A II, 15, 2 εἰ δύναιντο). εἰ τύχοι is used as a formula (oft. in later wr., incl. Philo; s. KReik, D. Opt. bei Polyb. u. Philo 1907, 154; Just., A I, 27, 3) it may be, for example, perhaps 1 Cor 15:37; used to tone down an assertion which may be too bold 14:10 (Lucian, Icar. 6 καὶ πολλάκις, εἰ τύχοι, μηδὲ ὁπόσοι στάδιοι Μεγαρόθεν Ἀθήναζέ εἰσιν, ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι ‘and many times, so it appears, not even knowing how many stades it is from Megara to Athens’).
    ② marker of an indirect question as content, that (Kühner-G. II 369, 8; Rob. 965. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 67 §283 ἀγανακτέω εἰ=be exasperated that; Sir 23:14 θελήσεις εἰ μὴ ἐγεννήθης; 2 Macc 14:28; 4 Macc 2:1; 4:7. S. on θαυμάζω 1aγ) ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν he was surprised that he was already dead Mk 15:44a. μὴ θαυμάζετε εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος do not wonder that the world hates you 1J 3:13; θαυμαζόντων …, εἰ τοσαύτη σπουδὴ ἦν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι that there was such interest in arresting MPol 7:2; AcPlCor 2:2 (cp. Just., A II, 8, 3 οὐδὲν … θαυμαστόν, εἰ). Sim. also (Procop. Soph., Ep. 123 χάριν ἔχειν εἰ=that) μαρτυρόμενος … εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός testifying … that the Christ was to suffer (s. πάσχω 3aα) Ac 26:23.—οὐ μέγα εἰ it is not surprising that 2 Cor 11:15 (cp. Aeschin., In Ctes. 94 ἐστὶ δεινὸν εἰ; Diod S 23, 15, 5, παράδοξον … εἰ=incredible … that; ibid. θαυμαστὸν εἰ; Gen 45:28 μέγα μοί ἐστιν εἰ).— That is also poss. after verbs of knowing or not knowing, e.g. J 9:25; Ac 19:2b; 1 Cor 1:16; 7:16; so CBurchard, ZNW 52, ’61, 73–82 but s. 5bα.
    ③ marker in causal clauses, when an actual case is taken as a supposition, where we also can use if instead of since: εἰ τὸν χόρτον … ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν if God so clothes the grass Mt 6:30; Lk 12:28; cp. Mt 7:11; Lk 11:13; J 7:23; 10:35; 13:14, 17, 32; Ac 4:9; 11:17; Ro 6:8; 15:27; Col 2:20; Hb 7:15; 1 Pt 1:17; 1J 4:11.
    ④ marker of strong or solemn assertion, without apodosis (=in aposiopesis; B-D-F §482; Rob. 1203) εἰ ἔγνως if you only knew Lk 19:42. εἰ βούλει παρενέγκαι if you would only let (this) pass 22:42 v.l. (cp. the letter fr. IV B.C. in Dssm., LO 120, note 5 [LAE 149]).—Hebraistic in oaths, like אִם: may this or that happen to me, if … (cp. 2 Km 3:25; GBuchanan, HTR 58, ’65, 319–24); this amounts to a strong negation certainly not (cp. Ps 7:4f; Gen 14:23) ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν εἰ δοθήσεται truly, I tell you, it will not be given Mk 8:12 (NColeman, JTS 28, 1927, 159–67 interprets this as strongly positive; against him FBurkitt, ibid. 274–76). εἰ εἰσελεύσονται they shall certainly not enter Hb 3:11; 4:3, 5 (all 3 Ps 94:11); B-D-F §372, 4; 454, 5; Mlt-H. 468f; Rob. 94; 1024.
    ⑤ marker of direct and indirect questions (without particle following)
    ⓐ (not in earlier Gk., B-D-F §440, 3; Rob. 916) w. direct questions (Gen 17:17; 44:19; Am 3:3–6; 6:12; TestAbr A 15 p.96, 8 [Stone p. 40]; 18 p. 100, 13 [St. p. 48]): εἰ ἔξεστιν; is it permitted, may one? Mt 12:10; 19:3 (cp. Mk 10:2); Lk 14:3 v.l.; Ac 21:37; 22:25. εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; are there only a few who will be saved? Lk 13:23; cp. Mk 8:23; Lk 22:49; Ac 1:6; 7:1; 19:2a. Cp. 6aβ.
    ⓑ freq. in indir. questions whether (Hom. et al.)
    α. w. pres. indic. (Gen 27:21; 42:16; TestJob 31:1; Jos., Ant. 10, 259; 16, 225; Ar 8, 1; Just., A I, 2, 2; A II, 2, 10) εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός whether you are the Christ Mt 26:63. εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν whether he is a sinner J 9:25; εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν whether there is a holy spirit Ac 19:2b (s. 2 above). ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται Mt 27:49; Mk 15:36 (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 20, 3 φέρʼ ἴδω εἰ=let me see whether, Merc. Cond. 6); cp. Mk 10:2; Lk 14:31; 1 Cor 3:12; 2 Cor 13:5; 1J 4:1.—W. the fut. indic. (4 Km 1:2; Job 5:1) εἰ θεραπεύσει αὐτόν whether he would heal him Mk 3:2 (v.l. θεραπεύει); Lk 6:7 v.l.; εἰ σώσεις whether you will save 1 Cor 7:16.—W. the aor. indic. (Esth 4:14; w. plpf. Just., D. 56, 2) εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν whether he had already died Mk 15:44b; εἰ ἐβάπτισα 1 Cor 1:16.
    β. w. subj. διώκω εἰ καταλάβω I press on (to see) whether I can capture Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §368; 375; Rob. 1017).
    γ. w. opt. (X., An. 1, 8, 15; 2, 1, 15; 4 Macc 9:27; 11:13) ἀνακρίνοντες … εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα examining … to see whether this was really so Ac 17:11. εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι 25:20; cp. 17:27.
    ⑥ In combination w. other particles, w. the other particles foll.
    ⓐ εἰ ἄρα
    α. expressing possibility if, indeed; if, in fact; whether (perhaps) (X., An. 3, 2, 22; SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; AcPt Ox 849, 6.
    β. introducing a direct question εἰ ἄρα ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; is it (really) so? Ac 7:1 v.l.; indirect qu. on the chance that (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9 ‘should you find it impossible’; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; in the hope that 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); AcPt Ox 849, 2; 22. Cp. εἰ δέ … ; What if …? Ac 23:9.
    ⓑ εἴ γε if indeed, inasmuch as (Kühner-G. II 177c) Eph 3:2; 4:21; Col 1:23. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ; εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ have you experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain Gal 3:4. εἴ γε καὶ ἐκδυσάμενοι οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα assuming, of course, that having put it off we shall not be found naked 2 Cor 5:3. [εἴ γ]ε οὕτως ὡς [ἔστιν καὶ παρελάβετε τὸν λόγον] AcPl BMM recto, 31f (restoration based on duplicate Ox 1602 verso, 37f and AcPl Ha 8, 24f, which has a slightly difft. text after εἴ γε [s. also the text of Ghent 62, 17 in HSanders, HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2]). S. γέ bα.
    ⓒ εἰ δὲ καί (Just., D. 110, 1) but if, and if Lk 11:18; 1 Cor 4:7; and even if 2 Cor 4:3 (but s. Lietzmann, Hdb.); 11:6. If, on the other hand, … then AcPlCor 2:28 (εἰ … δέ … καί … μή).
    ⓓ εἰ δὲ μή (γε) if not, otherwise
    α. after affirmat. clauses, w. the aor. ind, and ἄν in the apodosis J 14:2; or pres. ind. (Demosth., Prooem. 29, 3) and fut. (Gen 30:1; Bel 29 Theod.; PLond 1912, 98) Rv 2:5, 16; or pres. impv. J 14:11.—εἰ δὲ μή γε (μήγε some edd.) otherwise (Pla. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 27; Jos., Bell. 6, 120, Ant. 17, 113; Just., D. 105, 6; IGR IV, 833; POxy 1159, 6; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 167, 25; PGM 4, 2629; Da 3:15; Bel 8; TestSol 13:3 P): εἰ δὲ μή γε (sc. προσέχετε), μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε otherwise you have no reward Mt 6:1; cp. Lk 10:6. Elliptically: κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον• εἰ δὲ μή γε, ἐκκόψεις αὐτήν who knows, it may bear fruit next year; if not, fine, then cut it down (= have it cut down) 13:9.
    β. after negat. clauses, otherwise (X., An. 7, 1, 8; Diod S 3, 47, 4; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 100; LBW 1651 μὴ ἀδικεῖν…, εἰ δὲ μή; UPZ 196 I, 33 [119 B.C.]; Job 32:22) Mk 2:21f.—After a negative statement: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς. εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται people do not pour new wine into old skins; otherwise they burst Mt 9:17; cp. Lk 5:36. μή τίς με δόξῃ ἄφρονα εἶναι• εἰ δὲ μή γε, κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέχασθέ με no one is to consider me foolish; otherwise at least accept me as a fool 2 Cor 11:16.
    ⓔ εἰ καί even if, even though, although Lk 11:8; 18:4; 1 Cor 7:21; 2 Cor 4:16; 7:8; 12:11; Phil 2:17; Col 2:5; Hb 6:9; AcPlCor 2:32.
    ⓕ εἰ μὲν γάρ for if Ac 25:11 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν); 2 Cor 11:4; Hb 8:4 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν).
    ⓖ εἰ μὲν οὖν if, then Hb 7:11. W. εἰ δέ foll. (X., Cyr. 8, 7, 22; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.) Ac 19:38.
    ⓗ εἰ μέντοι if, on the other hand Js 2:8.
    ⓘ εἰ μή (=πλήν) but 1 Cor 7:17 (= in general) (B-D-F §376).—After negatives
    α. except, if not, mostly without a verb depending on εἰ μή (X., An. 2, 1, 12; JosAs 12:11; Just., A I, 29, 1) Mt 11:27; 12:24; 16:4; J 3:13; Ro 7:7; Gal 1:19 (HKoch, Z. Jakobusfrage Gal 1:19: ZNW 33, ’34, 204–9); but also with a verb (Jos., Ant. 8, 316) Mt 5:13; Mk 6:5; Ac 21:25 v.l.
    β. but (OGI 201, 20f οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἔξω; in note 33 the ed. gives exx. fr. Aristoph. for this use) without a verb Mt 12:4; w. a verb (Theod. Prodr. 7, 426 H.) Gal 1:7, s. ἄλλος 2b. For ἐκτὸς εἰ μή s. ἐκτός 3a.
    ⓙ εἰ μήτι unless indeed, unless perhaps (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 198 D.; Jos., Ant. 4, 280; Tat. 10, 2) Lk 9:13; 2 Cor 13:5; w. ἄν (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 4) 1 Cor 7:5 (s. Dssm., NB 32, 1 [BS 204 n.]; B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169; 239; Reinhold 35; JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attic. imitatore 1911, 56; JWackernagel, Antike Anredeformen 1912, 27f).
    ⓚ εἰ οὖν if, therefore Mt 6:23; Lk 11:36; 12:26; J 13:14; 18:8; Col 3:1; Phlm 17.
    ⓛ εἴπερ if indeed, if after all, since (X., An. 1, 7, 9; Menand., Epitr. 907 S. [587 Kö.]; PHal 7, 6; UPZ 59, 29 [168 B.C.]; Jdth 6:9; TestJob 3:6; Just., Tat., Ath.) Ro 3:30 (ἐπείπερ v.l.); 8:9, 17; 2 Th 1:6.—if indeed, provided that εἴπερ ἄρα (ἄρα 1a) 1 Cor 15:15. καὶ γὰρ εἴπερ for even if (cp. Od. 1, 167; B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 8:5; on 2 Cor 5:3 s. εἴ γε καί 6b above. Doubtful IEph 6:2; s. ἤ 2aβ.
    ⓜ if perchance, if haply εἰ δέ που … τις ἔλθοι if perchance … anyone came Papias (2:4).
    ⓝ εἴ πως (the spelling εἴπως is also correct; B-D-F §12) if perhaps, if somehow
    α. w. opt. (X., An. 2, 5, 2; 4, 1, 21; POxy 939, 15) εἴ πως δύναιντο παραχειμάσαι in the hope that they could spend the winter Ac 27:12.
    β. w. fut. indic. (3 Km 21:31; 4 Km 19:4; Jer 28:8; TestJos 6:6) εἴ πως εὐοδωθήσομαι whether, perhaps, I shall succeed Ro 1:10; cp. 11:14; Phil 3:11.
    ⓞ εἴτε … εἴτε (Soph. et al.; ins since 416 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw.]; pap [Mayser II/3, 159]; LXX; JosAs 5:9; ApcrEzk [Epiph 70, 11]; Jos., Ant. 16, 33 and 37; Just., Ath. B-D-F §446; 454, 3; Rob. ind.) if … (or) if, whether … or
    α. w. a verb in pres. indic. (Herm. Wr. 12, 22 thrice) 1 Cor 12:26; 2 Cor 1:6; or pres. subj. 1 Th 5:10.
    β. w. no verb (Just., D. 86, 3 al.) Ro 12:6–8; 1 Cor 3:22; 8:5; 2 Cor 5:10 al. εἴτε only once 1 Cor 14:27. εἴτε ἄρσενα εἴτε θήλειαν (ἤτε … ἤτε pap) GJs 4:1.
    ⑦ Used w. the indef. pron.: εἴ τις, εἴ τι everyone who or whoever; everything that or whatever Mt 16:24; 18:28; Mk 4:23; 9:35; Lk 9:23; 14:26; 1 Ti 3:1, 5; 5:4, 8, 16 al. Cp. 1 Cor 12:31 v.l. (ADebrunner, ConNeot XI, ’47, 37). W. subj. εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 s. 1b, above.—DELG. M-M.
    2
    εἰ μήν, more correctly εἶ μήν (B-D-F §24; Rob. 1150) for the older ἦ μήν (Hom. et al. [s. Denniston 350f], but found also Jos., Ant. 13, 76; 17, 42), in Hellenistic-Roman times (SIG 993, 20 [III B.C.]; 736, 27 [92 B.C.]; IG IV, 840, 15 [EHermann, Gr. Forschungen I 1912, 312]; pap since 112 B.C. [Mayser 78]; LXX e.g. Ezk 33:27; 34:8 al.; Num 14:28; Jdth 1:12; Bar 2:29 [Thackeray 83]) formula used in oaths surely, certainly Hb 6:14 (Gen 22:17).—Dssm., NB 33ff (BS 205ff).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰ

  • 12 ἔχω

    ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.
    ① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)
    ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control
    α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.
    β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.
    ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts
    α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.
    β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.
    ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.
    ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.
    ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.
    ② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as
    ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).
    ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.
    ③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip
    ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.
    ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.
    ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.
    ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.
    ④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).
    ⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.
    ⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.
    ⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)
    ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)
    α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.
    β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).
    γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.
    δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).
    ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.
    ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.
    ⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.
    ⑨ special combinations
    ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.
    ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).
    ⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).
    ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.
    ⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.
    ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.
    ⓑ of proximity
    α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.
    β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω

  • 13 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    ① marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    ⓐ w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    ⓑ w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    ⓒ w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    ② marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    ⓐ w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    ⓑ with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    ③ marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    ④ marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    ⓐ w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.—To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    ⑤ marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    ⑥ marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    ⓑ w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    ⓒ after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    ⑦ marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    ⑧ marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    ⑨ marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    ⓐ w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    ⓑ w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    ⓒ w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    ⑩ marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    ⑪ marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    ⑫ marker of hostile opposition, against
    ⓐ w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    ⓑ w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    ⑬ marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    ⑭ marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    ⓐ w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    ⑮ marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    ⑯ marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    ⑰ marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    ⑱ marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    ⓐ w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    ⓑ w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    ⓒ w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 14 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 15 ὁ

    ὁ, ἡ, τό pl. οἱ, αἱ, τά article, derived fr. a demonstrative pronoun, ‘the’. Since the treatment of the inclusion and omission of the art. belongs to the field of grammar, the lexicon can limit itself to exhibiting the main features of its usage. It is difficult to set hard and fast rules for the employment of the art., since the writer’s style had special freedom of play here—Kühner-G. I p. 589ff; B-D-F §249–76; Mlt. 80–84; Rob. 754–96; W-S. §17ff; Rdm.2 112–18; Abel §28–32; HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 642ff; FVölker, Syntax d. griech. Papyri I, Der Artikel, Progr. d. Realgymn. Münster 1903; FEakin, AJP 37, 1916, 333ff; CMiller, ibid. 341ff; EColwell, JBL 52, ’33, 12–21 (for a critique s. Mlt-H.-Turner III 183f); ASvensson, D. Gebr. des bestimmten Art. in d. nachklass. Epik ’37; RFink, The Syntax of the Greek Article ’53; JRoberts, Exegetical Helps, The Greek Noun with and without the Article: Restoration Qtly 14, ’71, 28–44; HTeeple, The Greek Article with Personal Names in the Synoptic Gospels: NTS 19, ’73, 302–17; Mussies 186–97.
    ① this one, that one, the art. funct. as demonstrative pronoun
    ⓐ in accordance w. epic usage (Hes., Works 450: ἡ=this [voice]) in the quot. fr. Arat., Phaenom. 5 τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν for we are also his (lit. this One’s) offspring Ac 17:28.
    ⓑ ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other (Polyaenus 6, 2, 1 ὁ μὲν … ὁ δὲ … ὁ δε; PSI 512, 21 [253 B.C.]); pl. οἱ μὲν … οἱ δέ (PSI 341, 9 [256 B.C.]; TestJob 29:1) some … others w. ref. to a noun preceding: ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος … οἱ μὲν ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Ac 14:4; 17:32; 28:24; 1 Cor 7:7; Gal 4:23; Phil 1:16f. Also without such a relationship expressed τοὺς μὲν ἀποστόλους, τοὺς δὲ προφήτας, τοὺς δὲ εὐαγγελιστάς Eph 4:11. οἱ μὲν … ὁ δέ Hb 7:5f, 20f. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι (δέ) J 7:12. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. τινὲς … οἱ δέ Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Leg. 1, 627a; 2, 658 B.; Aelian, VH 2, 34; Palaeph. 6, 5).—Mt 26:67; 28:17 οἱ δέ introduces a second class; just before this, instead of the first class, the whole group is mentioned (cp. X., Hell. 1, 2, 14, Cyr. 3, 2, 12; KMcKay, JSNT 24, ’85, 71f)= but some (as Arrian, Anab. 5, 2, 7; 5, 14, 4; Lucian, Tim. 4 p. 107; Hesych. Miles. [VI A.D.]: 390 Fgm. 1, 35 end Jac.).
    ⓒ To indicate the progress of the narrative, ὁ δέ, οἱ δέ but he, but they (lit. this one, they) is also used without ὁ μέν preceding (likew. Il. 1, 43; Pla., X.; also Clearchus, Fgm. 76b τὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν=but this man said; pap examples in Mayser II/1, 1926, 57f) e.g. Mt 2:9, 14; 4:4; 9:31; Mk 14:31 (cp. Just., A II, 2, 3). ὁ μὲν οὖν Ac 23:18; 28:5. οἱ μὲν οὖν 1:6; 5:41; 15:3, 30.—JO’Rourke, Paul’s Use of the Art. as a Pronoun, CBQ 34, ’72, 59–65.
    ② the, funct. to define or limit an entity, event, or state
    ⓐ w. nouns
    α. w. appellatives, or common nouns, where, as in Pla., Thu., Demosth. et al., the art. has double significance, specific or individualizing, and generic.
    א. In its individualizing use it focuses attention on a single thing or single concept, as already known or otherwise more definitely limited: things and pers. that are unique in kind: ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ σελήνη, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἡ θάλασσα, ὁ κόσμος, ἡ κτίσις, ὁ θεός (BWeiss [s. on θεός, beg.]), ὁ διάβολος, ὁ λόγος (J 1:1, 14), τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος etc. (but somet. the art. is omitted, esp. when nouns are used w. preps.; B-D-F §253, 1–4; Rob. 791f; Mlt-Turner 171). ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ J 18:20.—Virtues, vices, etc. (contrary to Engl. usage): ἡ ἀγάπη, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία et al.—The individualizing art. stands before a common noun that was previously mentioned (without the art.): τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους Lk 9:16 (after πέντε ἄρτοι vs. 13). τὸ βιβλίον 4:17b (after βιβλίον, vs. 17a), τοὺς μάγους Mt 2:7 (after μάγοι, vs. 1). J 4:43 (40); 12:6 (5); 20:1 (19:41); Ac 9:17 (11); Js 2:3 (2); Rv 15:6 (1).—The individ. art. also stands before a common noun which, in a given situation, is given special attention as the only or obvious one of its kind (Hipponax [VI B.C.] 13, 2 West=D.3 16 ὁ παῖς the [attending] slave; Diod S 18, 29, 2 ὁ ἀδελφός=his brother; Artem. 4, 71 p. 245, 19 ἡ γυνή=your wife; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 μετὰ Μωσῆ … ἐν τῷ ὄρει [Sinai]; Demetr. (?): 722 fgm 7 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 19, 4] ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος [Moriah]) τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ to the attendant (who took care of the synagogue) Lk 4:20. εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα into the basin (that was there for the purpose) J 13:5. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπο here is this (wretched) man 19:5. ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης or ἐλευθέρας by the (well-known) slave woman or the free woman (Hagar and Sarah) Gal 4:22f. τὸν σῖτον Ac 27:38. ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9 (s. ἐπιστολή) τὸ ὄρος the mountain (nearby) Mt 5:1; 8:1; 14:23; Mk 3:13; 6:46; Lk 6:12; 9:28 al.; ἡ πεισμονή this (kind of) persuasion Gal 5:8. ἡ μαρτυρία the (required) witness or testimony J 5:36.—The art. takes on the idea of κατʼ ἐξοχήν ‘par excellence’ (Porphyr., Abst. 24, 7 ὁ Αἰγύπτιος) ὁ ἐρχόμενος the one who is (was) to come or the coming one par excellence=The Messiah Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19. ὁ προφήτης J 1:21, 25; 7:40. ὁ διδάσκαλος τ. Ἰσραήλ 3:10 (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 5, 18 of Socrates: ὁ τῆς Ἑλλάδος διδάσκαλος); cp. MPol 12:2. With things (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Μάρπησσα: οἱ λίθοι=the famous stones [of the Parian Marble]) ἡ κρίσις the (last) judgment Mt 12:41. ἡ ἡμέρα the day of decision 1 Cor 3:13; (cp. Mi 4:6 Mt); Hb 10:25. ἡ σωτηρία (our) salvation at the consummation of the age Ro 13:11.
    ב. In its generic use it singles out an individual who is typical of a class, rather than the class itself: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος Mt 12:35. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 15:11. ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικός 18:17. ὁ ἐργάτης Lk 10:7. ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ J 2:25. τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12. ὁ κληρονόμος Gal 4:1. So also in parables and allegories: ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης Mt 24:43. Cp. J 10:11b, 12. The generic art. in Gk. is often rendered in Engl. by the indef. art. or omitted entirely.
    β. The use of the art. w. personal names is varied; as a general rule the presence of the art. w. a personal name indicates that the pers. is known; without the art. focus is on the name as such (s. Dssm., BPhW 22, 1902, 1467f; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Art. b. d. Eigennamen [im NT]: StKr 86, 1913, 349–89). Nevertheless, there is an unmistakable drift in the direction of Mod. Gk. usage, in which every proper name has the art. (B-D-F §260; Rob. 759–61; Mlt-Turner 165f). The ms. tradition varies considerably. In the gospels the art. is usu. found w. Ἰησοῦς; yet it is commonly absent when Ἰ. is accompanied by an appositive that has the art. Ἰ. ὁ Γαλιλαῖος Mt 26:69; Ἰ. ὁ Ναζωραῖος vs. 71; Ἰ. ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 27:17, 22. Sim. Μαριὰμ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰ. Ac 1:14. The art. somet. stands before oblique cases of indecl. proper names, apparently to indicate their case (B-D-F §260, 2; Rob. 760). But here, too, there is no hard and fast rule.—HTeeple, NTS 19, ’73, 302–17 (synopt.).
    γ. The art. is customarily found w. the names of countries (B-D-F §261, 4; W-S. § 18, 5 d; Rob. 759f); less freq. w. names of cities (B-D-F §261, 1; 2; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 170–72). W. Ἰερουσαλήμ, Ἱεροσόλυμα it is usu. absent (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα); it is only when this name has modifiers that it must have the art. ἡ νῦν Ἰ. Gal 4:25; ἡ ἄνω Ἰ. vs. 26; ἡ καινὴ Ἰ. Rv 3:12. But even in this case it lacks the art. when the modifier follows: Hb 12:22.—Names of rivers have the art. ὁ Ἰορδάνης, ὁ Εὐφράτης, ὁ Τίβερις Hv 1, 1, 2 (B-D-F §261, 8; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 172). Likew. names of seas ὁ Ἀδρίας Ac 27:27.
    δ. The art. comes before nouns that are accompanied by the gen. of a pronoun (μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 1:21, 25; 5:45; 6:10–12; 12:49; Mk 9:17; Lk 6:27; 10:7; 16:6; Ro 4:19; 6:6 and very oft. (only rarely is it absent: Mt 19:28; Lk 1:72; 2:32; 2 Cor 8:23; Js 5:20 al.).
    ε. When accompanied by the possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος the noun always has the art., and the pron. stands mostly betw. art. and noun: Mt 18:20; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 26:5; Ro 3:7 and oft. But only rarely so in John: J 4:42; 5:47; 7:16. He prefers to repeat the article w. the possessive following the noun ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή J 5:30; cp. 7:6; 17:17; 1J 1:3 al.
    ζ. Adjectives (or participles), when they modify nouns that have the art., also come either betw. the art. and noun: ἡ ἀγαθὴ μερίς Lk 10:42; τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 12:10; Ac 1:8; ἡ δικαία κρίσις J 7:24 and oft., or after the noun w. the art. repeated τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Mk 3:29; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15. ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος 1J 1:2; 2:25. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν Ac 12:10. Only rarely does an adj. without the art. stand before a noun that has an art. (s. B-D-F §270, 1; Rob. 777; Mlt-Turner 185f): ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 Cor 11:5. εἶπεν μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ Ac 14:10 v.l.; cp. 26:24. κοιναῖς ταῖς χερσίν Mk 7:5 D.—Double modifier τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ χρυσοῦν τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; 9:13. ἡ πόρνη ἡ μεγάλη ἡ καθημένη 17:1.—Mk 5:36 τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον is prob. a wrong rdg. (B has τὸν λαλ., D τοῦτον τὸν λ. without λαλούμενον).—On the art. w. ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς s. the words in question.
    η. As in the case of the poss. pron. (ε) and adj. (ζ), so it is w. other expressions that can modify a noun: ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις Ro 9:11. ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη 11:27. ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ εἰς ζωήν Ro 7:10. ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8. ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 2 Cor 8:4.
    θ. The art. precedes the noun when a demonstrative pron. (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging with it comes before or after; e.g.: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος Lk 14:30; J 9:24. οὗτος ὁ λαός Mk 7:6. οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου Lk 15:24. οὗτος ὁ τελώνης 18:11 and oft. ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Mk 14:71; Lk 2:25; 23:4, 14, 47. ὁ λαὸς οὗτος Mt 15:8. ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος Lk 15:30 and oft.—ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα Mt 7:22; 22:46. ἐκ. ἡ ὥρα 10:19; 18:1; 26:55. ἐκ. ὁ καιρός 11:25; 12:1; 14:1. ἐκ. ὁ πλάνος 27:63 and oft. ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη Mt 7:25, 27. ἡ ὥρα ἐκ. 8:13; 9:22; ἡ γῆ ἐκ. 9:26, 31; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκ. 13:1. ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκ. vs. 44 and oft.—ὁ αὐτός s. αὐτός 3b.
    ι. An art. before a nom. noun makes it a vocative (as early as Hom.; s. KBrugman4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 431; Schwyzer II 63f; B-D-F §147; Rob. 769. On the LXX Johannessohn, Kasus 14f.—ParJer 1:1 Ἰερεμία ὁ ἐκλεκτός μου; 7:2 χαῖρε Βαρούχι ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πίστεως) ναί, ὁ πατήρ Mt 11:26. τὸ κοράσιον, ἔγειρε Mk 5:41. Cp. Mt 7:23; 27:29 v.l.; Lk 8:54; 11:39; 18:11, 13 (Goodsp, Probs. 85–87); J 19:3 and oft.
    ⓑ Adjectives become substantives by the addition of the art.
    α. ὁ πονηρός Eph 6:16. οἱ σοφοί 1 Cor 1:27. οἱ ἅγιοι, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ πολλοί al. Likew. the neut. τὸ κρυπτόν Mt 6:4. τὸ ἅγιον 7:6. τὸ μέσον Mk 3:3. τὸ θνητόν 2 Cor 5:4. τὰ ἀδύνατα Lk 18:27. τὸ ἔλαττον Hb 7:7. Also w. gen. foll. τὰ ἀγαθά σου Lk 16:25. τὸ μωρόν, τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 1:25; cp. vs. 27f. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 1:19. τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ θεοῦ vs. 20. τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου 8:3. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 2 Cor 4:2.
    β. Adj. attributes whose noun is customarily omitted come to have substantive force and therefore receive the art. (B-D-F §241; Rob. 652–54) ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5; ἡ ξηρά 23:15 (i.e. γῆ). ἡ ἀριστερά, ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) 6:3. ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc. ἡμέρα) Ac 16:11. ἡ ἔρημος (sc. χώρα) Mt 11:7.
    γ. The neut. of the adj. w. the art. can take on the mng. of an abstract noun (Thu. 1, 36, 1 τὸ δεδιός=fear; Herodian 1, 6, 9; 1, 11, 5 τὸ σεμνὸν τῆς παρθένου; M. Ant. 1, 1; Just., D. 27, 2 διὰ τὸ σκληροκάρδιον ὑμῶν καὶ ἀχάριστον εἰς αὐτόν) τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ God’s kindness Ro 2:4. τὸ δυνατόν power 9:22. τὸ σύμφορον benefit 1 Cor 7:35. τὸ γνήσιον genuineness 2 Cor 8:8. τὸ ἐπιεικές Phil 4:5 al.
    δ. The art. w. numerals indicates, as in Il. 5, 271f; X. et al. (HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 662ff), that a part of a number already known is being mentioned (Diod S 18, 10, 2 τρεῖς μὲν φυλὰς … τὰς δὲ ἑπτά=‘but the seven others’; Plut., Cleom. 804 [8, 4] οἱ τέσσαρες=‘the other four’; Polyaenus 6, 5 οἱ τρεῖς=‘the remaining three’; Diog. L. 1, 82 Βίας προκεκριμένος τῶν ἑπτά=Bias was preferred before the others of the seven [wise men]. B-D-F §265): οἱ ἐννέα the other nine Lk 17:17. Cp. 15:4; Mt 18:12f. οἱ δέκα the other ten (disciples) 20:24; Mk 10:41; lepers Lk 17:17. οἱ πέντε … ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος five of them … one … the last one Rv 17:10.
    ⓒ The ptc. w. the art. receives
    α. the mng. of a subst. ὁ πειράζων the tempter Mt 4:3; 1 Th 3:5. ὁ βαπτίζων Mk 6:14. ὁ σπείρων Mt 13:3; Lk 8:5. ὁ ὀλεθρεύων Hb 11:28. τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:30, 34. τὸ αὐλούμενον 1 Cor 14:7. τὸ λαλούμενον vs. 9 (Just., D. 32, 3 τὸ ζητούμενον). τὰ γινόμενα Lk 9:7. τὰ ἐρχόμενα J 16:13. τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Cor 1:28. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (s. ὑπάρχω 1). In Engl. usage many of these neuters are transl. by a relative clause, as in β below. B-D-F §413; Rob. 1108f.
    β. the mng. of a relative clause (Ar. 4, 2 al. οἱ νομίζοντες) ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς whoever receives you Mt 10:40. τῷ τύπτοντί σε Lk 6:29. ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν J 15:23. οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον τὸ δεδομένον (ὸ̔ δέδοται) Ac 4:12. τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Gal 1:7. Cp. Lk 7:32; 18:9; J 12:12; Col 2:8; 1 Pt 1:7; 2J 7; Jd 4 al. So esp. after πᾶς: πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος everyone who becomes angry Mt 5:22. πᾶς ὁ κρίνων Ro 2:1 al. After μακάριος Mt 5:4, 6, 10. After οὐαὶ ὑμῖν Lk 6:25.
    ⓓ The inf. w. neut. art. (B-D-F §398ff; Rob. 1062–68) is used in a number of ways.
    α. It stands for a noun (B-D-F §399; Rob. 1062–66) τὸ (ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν) φαγεῖν Mt 15:20. τὸ (ἐκ νεκρῶν) ἀναστῆναι Mk 9:10. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν 12:33; cp. Ro 13:8. τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 2 Cor 8:11. τὸ καθίσαι Mt 20:23. τὸ θέλειν Ro 7:18; 2 Cor 8:10.—Freq. used w. preps. ἀντὶ τοῦ, διὰ τό, διὰ τοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, ἕνεκεν τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, πρὸς τό etc.; s. the preps. in question (B-D-F §402–4; Rob. 1068–75).
    β. The gen. of the inf. w. the art., without a prep., is esp. frequent (B-D-F §400; Mlt. 216–18; Rob. 1066–68; DEvans, ClQ 15, 1921, 26ff). The use of this inf. is esp. common in Lk and Paul, less freq. in Mt and Mk, quite rare in other writers. The gen. stands
    א. dependent on words that govern the gen.: ἄξιον 1 Cor 16:4 (s. ἄξιος 1c). ἐξαπορηθῆναι τοῦ ζῆν 2 Cor 1:8. ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι Lk 1:9 (cp. 1 Km 14:47 v.l. Σαοὺλ ἔλαχεν τοῦ βασιλεύειν).
    ב. dependent on a noun (B-D-F §400, 1; Rob. 1066f) ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν Lk 1:57. ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 2:6. ἐξουσία τοῦ πατεῖν 10:19. εὐκαιρία τοῦ παραδοῦναι 22:6. ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10. ἐπιποθία τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:23. χρείαν ἔχειν τοῦ διδάσκειν Hb 5:12. καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 1 Pt 4:17. τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι the power that enables him Phil 3:21. ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν zeal in desiring 2 Cor 8:11.
    ג. Somet. the connection w. the noun is very loose, and the transition to the consecutive sense (=result) is unmistakable (B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1066f): ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν Lk 2:21. ὀφειλέται … τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν Ro 8:12. εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1:24. ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 11:8. τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 Cor 10:13.
    ד. Verbs of hindering, ceasing take the inf. w. τοῦ μή (s. Schwyzer II 372 for earlier Gk; PGen 16, 23 [207 A.D.] κωλύοντες τοῦ μὴ σπείρειν; LXX; ParJer 2:5 φύλαξαι τοῦ μὴ σχίσαι τὰ ἱμάτιά σου): καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κατέχειν Lk 4:42. κρατεῖσθαι 24:16. κωλύειν Ac 10:47. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). ὑποστέλλεσθαι Ac 20:20, 27. Without μή: ἐγκόπτεσθαι τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:22.
    ה. The gen. of the inf. comes after verbs of deciding, exhorting, commanding, etc. (1 Ch 19:19; ParJer 7:37 διδάσκων αὐτοὺ τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι) ἐγένετο γνώμης Ac 20:3. ἐντέλλεσθαι Lk 4:10 (Ps 90:11). ἐπιστέλλειν Ac 15:20. κατανεύειν Lk 5:7. κρίνειν Ac 27:1. παρακαλεῖν 21:12. προσεύχεσθαι Js 5:17. τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν Lk 9:51. συντίθεσθαι Ac 23:20.
    ו. The inf. w. τοῦ and τοῦ μή plainly has final (=purpose) sense (ParJer 5:2 ἐκάθισεν … τοῦ ἀναπαῆναι ὀλίγον; Soph., Lex. I 45f; B-D-F §400, 5 w. exx. fr. non-bibl. lit. and pap; Rob. 1067): ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν a sower went out to sow Mt 13:3. ζητεῖν τοῦ ἀπολέσαι = ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ 2:13. τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν Lk 1:77. τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας vs. 79. τοῦ σινιάσαι 22:31. τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν Ro 6:6. τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτά Gal 3:10. τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτόν Phil 3:10. Cp. Mt 3:13; 11:1; 24:45; Lk 2:24, 27; 8:5; 24:29; Ac 3:2; 20:30; 26:18; Hb 10:7 (Ps 39:9); 11:5; GJs 2:3f; 24:1.—The apparently solecistic τοῦ πολεμῆσαι Ro 12:7 bears a Semitic tinge, cp. Hos 9:13 et al. (Mussies 96).—The combination can also express
    ז. consecutive mng. (result): οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε τοῦ πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ you did not change your minds and believe him Mt 21:32. τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα Ro 7:3. τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα Ac 7:19. Cp. 3:12; 10:25.
    ⓔ The art. is used w. prepositional expressions (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 7 ὁ ἐν Περγάμῳ; 4, 36 ὁ ἐν Μαγνησίᾳ; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010 recto, 8–12] οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις … οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ μετεώροις; Tat. 31, 2 οἱ μὲν περὶ Κράτητα … οἱ δὲ περὶ Ἐρατοσθένη) τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς ἐν Κεγχρεαῖς Ro 16:1. ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ Rv 1:4. τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν (w. place name) ἐκκλησίας 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (on these pass. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 42–45). τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ to those in the house Mt 5:15. πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς 6:9. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας Hb 13:24. οἱ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ Ro 8:1. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22. οἱ ἐξ εὐωνύμων Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον … τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; cp. 9:13. On 1:4 s. ref in B-D-F §136, 1 to restoration by Nestle. οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 3:21. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mt 12:3. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49 al.—Neut. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου pieces of wreckage fr. the ship Ac 27:44 (difft. FZorell, BZ 9, 1911, 159f). τὰ περί τινος Lk 24:19, 27; Ac 24:10; Phil 1:27 (Tat. 32, 2 τὰ περὶ θεοῦ). τὰ περί τινα 2:23. τὰ κατʼ ἐμέ my circumstances Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον what (was to be done) according to the law Lk 2:39. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν Ro 12:18. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1 (X., Resp. Lac. 13, 11 ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους). τὰ παρʼ αὐτῶν Lk 10:7. τὸ ἐν ἐμοί the (child) in me GJs 12:2 al.
    ⓕ w. an adv. or adverbial expr. (1 Macc 8:3) τὸ ἔμπροσθεν Lk 19:4. τὸ ἔξωθεν Mt 23:25. τὸ πέραν Mt 8:18, 28. τὰ ἄνω J 8:23; Col 3:1f. τὰ κάτω J 8:23. τὰ ὀπίσω Mk 13:16. τὰ ὧδε matters here Col 4:9. ὁ πλησίον the neighbor Mt 5:43. οἱ καθεξῆς Ac 3:24. τὸ κατὰ σάρκα Ro 9:5. τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Cor 13:10.—Esp. w. indications of time τό, τὰ νῦν s. νῦν 2b. τὸ πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2. τὸ λοιπόν 1 Cor 7:29; Phil 3:1. τὸ πρῶτον J 10:40; 12:16; 19:39. τὸ πρότερον 6:62; Gal 4:13. τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν daily Lk 11:3.—τὸ πλεῖστον at the most 1 Cor 14:27.
    ⓖ The art. w. the gen. foll. denotes a relation of kinship, ownership, or dependence: Ἰάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου Mt 10:2 (Thu. 4, 104 Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου [sc. υἱός]; Plut., Timol. 3, 2; Appian, Syr. 26 §123 Σέλευκος ὁ Ἀντιόχου; Jos., Bell. 5, 5; 11). Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου Lk 24:10. ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου the wife of Uriah Mt 1:6. οἱ Χλόης Chloë’s people 1 Cor 1:11. οἱ Ἀριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου Ro 16:10f. οἱ αὐτοῦ Ac 16:33. οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cor 15:23; Gal 5:24. Καισάρεια ἡ Φιλίππου Caesarea Philippi i.e. the city of Philip Mk 8:27.—τό, τά τινος someone’s things, affairs, circumstances (Thu. 4, 83 τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου; Parthenius 1, 6; Appian, Syr. 16 §67 τὰ Ῥωμαίων) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, τῶν ἀνθρώπων Mt 16:23; 22:21; Mk 8:33; cp. 1 Cor 2:11. τὰ τῆς σαρκός, τοῦ πνεύματος Ro 8:5; cp. 14:19; 1 Cor 7:33f; 13:11. τὰ ὑμῶν 2 Cor 12:14. τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου 11:30. τὰ τοῦ νόμου what the law requires Ro 2:14. τὸ τῆς συκῆς what has been done to the fig tree Mt 21:21; cp. 8:33. τὰ ἑαυτῆς its own advantage 1 Cor 13:5; cp. Phil 2:4, 21. τὸ τῆς παροιμίας what the proverb says 2 Pt 2:22 (Pla., Theaet. 183e τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου; Menand., Dyscolus 633 τὸ τοῦ λόγου). ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house (so Field, Notes 50–56; Goodsp. Probs. 81–83; difft., ‘interests’, PTemple, CBQ 1, ’39, 342–52.—In contrast to the other synoptists, Luke does not elsewhere show Jesus ‘at home’.) Lk 2:49 (Lysias 12, 12 εἰς τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ; Theocr. 2, 76 τὰ Λύκωνος; pap in Mayser II [1926] p. 8; POxy 523, 3 [II A.D.] an invitation to a dinner ἐν τοῖς Κλαυδίου Σαραπίωνος; PTebt 316 II, 23 [99 A.D.] ἐν τοῖς Ποτάμωνος; Esth 7:9; Job 18:19; Jos., Ant. 16, 302. Of the temple of a god Jos., C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός). Mt 20:15 is classified here by WHatch, ATR 26, ’44, 250–53; s. also ἐμός b.
    ⓗ The neut. of the art. stands
    α. before whole sentences or clauses (Epict. 4, 1, 45 τὸ Καίσαρος μὴ εἶναι φίλον; Prov. Aesopi 100 P. τὸ Οὐκ οἶδα; Jos., Ant. 10, 205; Just., D. 33, 2 τὸ γὰρ … [Ps 109:4]) τὸ Οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις κτλ. (quot. fr. the Decalogue) Mt 19:18; Ro 13:9. τὸ Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (quot. fr. Is 53:12) Lk 22:37. Cp. Gal 5:14. τὸ Εἰ δύνῃ as far as your words ‘If you can’ are concerned Mk 9:23. Likew. before indirect questions (Vett. Val. 291, 14 τὸ πῶς τέτακται; Ael. Aristid. 45, 15 K. τὸ ὅστις ἐστίν; ParJer 6:15 τὸ πῶς ἀποστείλης; GrBar 8:6 τὸ πῶς ἐταπεινώθη; Jos., Ant. 20, 28 ἐπὶ πείρᾳ τοῦ τί φρονοῖεν; Pel.-Leg. p. 20, 32 τὸ τί γένηται; Mel., Fgm. 8, 2 [Goodsp. p. 311] τὸ δὲ πῶς λούονται) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό Lk 1:62. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 9:46. τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Th 4:1. Cp. Lk 19:48; 22:2, 4, 23f; Ac 4:21; 22:30; Ro 8:26; Hs 8, 1, 4.
    β. before single words which are taken fr. what precedes and hence are quoted, as it were (Epict. 1, 29, 16 τὸ Σωκράτης; 3, 23, 24; Hierocles 13 p. 448 ἐν τῷ μηδείς) τὸ ‘ἀνέβη’ Eph 4:9. τὸ ‘ἔτι ἅπαξ’ Hb 12:27. τὸ ‘Ἁγάρ’ Gal 4:25.
    ⓘ Other notable uses of the art. are
    α. the elliptic use, which leaves a part of a sentence accompanied by the art. to be completed fr. the context: ὁ τὰ δύο the man with the two (talents), i.e. ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβών Mt 25:17; cp. vs. 22. τῷ τὸν φόρον Ro 13:7. ὁ τὸ πολύ, ὀλίγον the man who had much, little 2 Cor 8:15 after Ex 16:18 (cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 9 ὁ τὴν σύριγγα [sc. ἔχων]; Arrian, Anab. 7, 8, 3 τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ [sc. ὁδόν]).
    β. Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9; s. καί 2h.
    γ. the fem. art. is found in a quite singular usage ἡ οὐαί (ἡ θλῖψις or ἡ πληγή) Rv 9:12; 11:14. Sim. ὁ Ἀμήν 3:14 (here the masc. art. is evidently chosen because of the alternate name for Jesus).
    ⓙ One art. can refer to several nouns connected by καί
    α. when various words, sing. or pl., are brought close together by a common art.: τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς Mt 2:4; cp. 16:21; Mk 15:1. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις κ. ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ Ac 1:8; cp. 8:1; Lk 5:17 al.—Even nouns of different gender can be united in this way (Aristoph., Eccl. 750; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 12 p. 37a οἱ δύο θεοί, of Apollo and Artemis; Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. c. 292; PTebt 14, 10 [114 B.C.]; En 18:14; EpArist 109) κατὰ τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας Col 2:22. Cp. Lk 1:6. εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμούς 14:23.
    β. when one and the same person has more than one attribute applied to him: πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν J 20:17. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ (ἡμῶν) Eph 5:20; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. Of Christ: τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ σωτῆρος 2 Pt 1:11; cp. 2:20; 3:18. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Tit 2:13 (PGrenf II, 15 I, 6 [139 B.C.] of the deified King Ptolemy τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος [ἐπιφανοῦς] εὐχαρίστου).
    γ. On the other hand, the art. is repeated when two different persons are named: ὁ φυτεύων καὶ ὁ ποτίζων 1 Cor 3:8. ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμών Ac 26:30.
    ⓚ In a fixed expression, when a noun in the gen. is dependent on another noun, the art. customarily appears twice or not at all: τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 3:16; πνεῦμα θεοῦ Ro 8:9. ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 2:17; λόγος θεοῦ 1 Th 2:13. ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου 2 Th 2:2; ἡμ. κ. 1 Th 5:2. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Mt 8:20; υἱ. ἀ. Hb 2:6. ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν Mt 22:31; ἀ. ν. Ac 23:6. ἡ κοιλία τῆς μητρός J 3:4; κ. μ. Mt 19:12.—APerry, JBL 68, ’49, 329–34; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 93–95.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁ

  • 16 εἰμί

    A sum), [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἔμμι Sapph.2.15, Theoc.20.32; Cret. [full] ἠμί GDI 4959a; [ per.] 2sg. εἶ, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion.

    εἰς Od.17.388

    , al., [dialect] Aeol. ἔσσι, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Dor.

    ἐσσί Il.1.176

    , Pi.O.6.90, Sophr.134;

    ἐσί GDI4959a

    ; [ per.] 3sg. ἐστί, [dialect] Dor.

    ἐντί IG12(1).677

     ([place name] Rhodes), Theoc.1.17, etc.; [ per.] 3 dual

    ἐστόν Th.3.112

    ; [ per.] 1pl. ἐσμέν, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. εἰμέν (also in Pi.P.3.60),

    ἐμέν Call.Fr. 294

    , [dialect] Dor.

    εἰμές Theoc.15.73

    , but

    ἠμέν GDI5178.34

    ; [ per.] 3pl. εἰσί ([etym.] - ίν), [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἔασι ([etym.] - ιν) Il.7.73, Xenoph.8.1, Antim.29, Herod.4.84, [dialect] Dor.

    ἐντί Pi.N.1.24

    , Theoc.11.45, IG9(1).32.22 ([place name] Phocis), etc.: imper. ἴσθι (

    ἔσθι Hecat.361

     J.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also in [voice] Med. form

    ἔσσο Od.3.200

    , Sapph.1.28, Maced.Pae.31, late Prose

    ἔσο Plu.2.241d

    , M.Ant.3.5, Hld.5.12, Porph.Marc.34; [ per.] 3sg. ἔστω (

    ἤτω LXXPs.103.31

    , and late Inscrr., CIG2664, al.; but in Pl.R. 361c leg. ἴτω), [dialect] Dor. εἴτω, ἤτω, Heraclid. ap. Eust.1411.21, Elean

    ἤστω Schwyzer 424

    ; [ per.] 3pl. ἔστωσαν, but

    ἔστων Hom.

    , Pl.R. 502a,

    ὄντων Id.Lg. 879b

    , and early [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.22, etc. ( ἔστωσαν first in ii B. C., ib.22.1328), [dialect] Dor. ἐόντων ib.1126: subj. ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, [dialect] Ep.

    ἔω Od.9.18

    ; [ per.] 3sg.

    ἔῃ Il.12.300

    ,al. (also

    ἔῃσι 2.366

    , al., ᾖσι ([etym.] ν) 19.202, Hes.Op. 294), also [dialect] Boeot.

    ἔνθω IG7.3172.165

    ,

    μετείω Il.23.47

     and perh.

    εἴῃ 9.245

    , etc.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl.

    ὦντι SIG940.3

     ([place name] Crete),

    ἔωντι GDI5040.14

     ([place name] Hierapytna), [dialect] Boeot.

    ἴωνθι IG7.3171.46

     (iii B. C.): opt. εἴην, -ης (

    εἴησθα Thgn.715

    ), -η, also ἔοις, ἔοι, Il.9.284, 142, al., cf. Hdt.7.6; [ per.] 3pl.

    εἴοισαν Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1911.133

     ([place name] Gonni); [ per.] 3 dual

    εἴτην Pl. Prm. 149e

    , Sph. 243e; [ per.] 1pl.

    εἶμεν E.Alc. 921

     (lyr.), Pl.; [ per.] 2pl.

    εἶτε Od. 21.195

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    εἶεν Il.2.372

    , etc.,

    εἴησαν Hdt.1.2

    , etc.; Elean ἔα, = εἴη, SIG9 (vi B. C.), and σύν-εαν, = συνεῖεν, GDI 1149 (vi B. C.): inf. εἶναι, Arc.

    ἦναι SIG306.9

     (Tegea, iv B. C.); [dialect] Ep. ἔμμεναι (also [dialect] Aeol.

    ἔμμεν' Sapph.34

    ), ἔμμεν (also Pi.P.6.42, S.Ant. 623 (lyr.)), ἔμεναι, ἔμεν, also

    ἔμειν SIG1166

     ([place name] Dodona); [dialect] Dor. εἶμεν Foed. ap. Th.5.77,79, IG7.1.7 ([place name] Megara),

    ἦμεν Test.Epict.5.16

    , Tab.Heracl.1.75, Cret. ἦμεν or

    ἤμην Leg.Gort.1.15

    , al., GDI4998i 2, al., Megar.

    εἴμεναι Ar.Ach. 775

    ,

    εἴμειν IG12(1).155.100

     ([place name] Rhodes), 14.952 ([place name] Agrigentum); εἶν ib. 12(9).211.10 ([place name] Eretria), SIG135.4 ([place name] Olynthus), etc.: part. ὤν, [dialect] Ep. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, Cypr.

    ἰών Inscr.Cypr.135.23

     H.; [dialect] Boeot. fem.

    ἰῶσα IG 7.3172.116

     (Orchom.), [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. fem.

    ἔσσα Sapph.75.4

    , IG4.952.2 (Epid.), Theoc.28.16,

    ἐοῖσα Pi.P.4.265

    ,

    ἔασσα Lyr.Alex.Adesp. 9

    , Diotog. ap. Stob.4.7.62,

    εὖσα Erinn.5.5

     (also [dialect] Ion., Herod.5.16,

    εὔντων 2.85

    ),

    ἐᾶσα Ti.Locr.96d

    , IG5(1).1470.8 ([place name] Messene),

    ἴαττα Leg.Gort.8.47

    ; acc. sg.

    εὖντα Theoc.2.3

    ; nom. sg. εἴς in Heraclid. ap. Eust.1756.13, pl.

    ἔντες Tab.Heracl.1.117

    ; dat. pl. ἔντασσι ib.104; gen. pl.

    παρ-έντων Alcm. 64

    : [tense] impf.

    ἦν Il.2.77

    , etc., [dialect] Ep. ἔον (also [dialect] Aeol., Alc.127, Sapph.Oxy. 1787 Fr.3 ii 21), in [dialect] Att. ἦ (dub. in [dialect] Aeol., Alc. Supp.14.9), Ar.Pl.77, Pl.Phd. 61b, etc., but usu. altered to ἦν in codd. (and ἦν is required by metre in E. Ion 280), [var] contr. from [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. ἦα (Il.5.808, al., IG12(8).449.2 ([place name] Thasos), whence Hom.and later [dialect] Ion.

    ἔᾱ Il.4.321

    , al.,

    ἔας Hdt.1.187

    ,

    ἔατε Id.4.119

    ); [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. ἦεν, always with ν in Hom.; ἔην as [ per.] 1sg., only Il.11.762 (s. v.l., al. ἔον), freq. as [ per.] 3sg. (generally before a consonant, so that ἔεν is possible), sts. also ἤην; [ per.] 2sg. ἦσθα, later ἦς (wh. is v.l. in Pi.I.1.26), sts. in LXX (Jd. 11.35, Ru.3.2,al.), cf. Pl.Ax. 365e, Erinn.4.4, Ev.Matt.25.21, al.,

    ἦσθας Men.Epit. 156

    , [dialect] Ep. ἔησθα; [ per.] 3sg. ἦν, [dialect] Ep. ἔην, ἤην, ἦεν (v. supr.), [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.

    ἦς Alc.Supp.30.1

    , Epich.102, Sophr.59, Theoc.2.90, SIG241.145 (Delph.); [ per.] 3 dual

    ἤστην Il.5.10

    , E.Hipp. 387, Ar.Eq. 982, Pl.Euthd. 272a, al.; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 1pl.

    ἦμες Plu.Lyc.21

    ; [ per.] 2pl.

    ἦτε Pl.Euthd. 276c

    ,

    ἦστε Ar. Pax 821

    , Ec. 1086; [ per.] 3pl. ἦσαν, [dialect] Ion. and Poet. ἔσαν (in Hes.Th. 321, 825, ἦν is not pl. for ἦσαν, but is rather a peculiarity of syntax, v. infr. v, but is [ per.] 3pl. in Epich.46, al., SIG560.15 (Epidamnus, iii B. C.)); [dialect] Aeol.

    ἔον Schwyzer 644.12

    ; later

    ἤμην PSI4.362.21

     (iii B. C.), SIG527.46 (Crete, iii B. C.), IGRom.4.1740 ([place name] Cyme), always in LXX as Ba.1.19, cf. Ev.Matt.23.30, Plu.2.174a, etc., and sts. in codd. of earlier writers, Lys.7.34, Trag.Adesp. 124 (cited from E. Hel. 931 by Choerob. and from Id.Tr. 474 by Aps.), X.Cyr.6.1.9, Hyp.Ath.26, [ per.] 2sg.

    ἦσο Epigr.Gr.379

     ([place name] Aezani), [ per.] 3sg.

    ἦστο Supp.Epigr. 1.455.7

     ([place name] Phrygia), [ per.] 1pl.

    ἤμεθα PPetr.2p.11

     (iii B. C.), LXX Ba.1.19, 1 Ki.25.16, Ep.Eph.2.3; subj.

    ὦμαι PBaden 48.12

     (ii B. C.), ἦται GDI 1696, ἦνται prob. in IG5(1).1390.83 ([place name] Andania); [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. also ἔσκον, used by A.Pers. 656 (lyr.): [tense] fut. ἔσομαι, ἔσται, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Aeol. also ἔσσομαι, ἔσεται, ἔσσεται; [dialect] Aeol. [ per.] 2sg. ἔσσῃ prob. in Alc.67,87; [dialect] Dor. 2 and [ per.] 3sg. ἐσσῇ, ἐσσεῖται, Il.2.393, 13.317, Theoc.10.5, [ per.] 3pl. ἐσσοῦνται Foed. ap. Th.5.77 codd. (but

    ἔσσονται Tab.Heracl.1.113

    ), inf.

    ἐσσεῖσθαι Sophr.57

    .—All forms of the [tense] pres.ind. are enclitic (exc. [ per.] 2sg. εἶ and [ per.] 3pl. ἔασι); but [ per.] 3sg. is written ἔστι when it begins a sentence or verse, or when it immediately follows οὐκ, καί, εἰ, ὡς, ἀλλά, or τοῦτ', Hdn.Gr.1.553 (also μή acc. to EM301.3); later Gramm. wrote ἔστι as Subst. Verb, Phot., Eust.880.22.
    A as the Subst. Verb,
    I of persons, exist,

    οὐκ ἔσθ' οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ' ἔσσεται Od.16.437

    ; ἔτ' εἰσί they are still in being, 15.433, cf. S.Ph. 445, etc.;

    τεθνηῶτος.. μηδ' ἔτ' ἐόντος Od.1.289

    ; οὐκέτ' ἐστί he is no more, E.Hipp. 1162; οὐδὲ δὴν ἦν he was not long- lived, Il.6.131; ὁ οὐκ ὤν, οἱ οὐκ ὄντες, of those who are no more, Th.2.45,44; οἱ ὄντες the living, Plb.9.29.2; ὁ ὤν the Eternal, LXX Ex.3.14, al., Ph.1.289;

    θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.1.290

    ; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, 2.119;

    κἀγὼ γὰρ ἦ ποτ', ἀλλὰ νῦν οὐκ εἴμ' ἔτι E.Hec. 284

    ; ὡς ἂν εἶεν ἅνθρωποι might continue in being, Pl.Smp. 190c;

    ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων D.18.72

    , cf. Arist.GC 318b25; of things, εἰ ἔστι ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.3.17, etc.; of cities,

    ὄλωλεν, οὐδ' ἔτ' ἐστὶ Τροία E.Tr. 1292

    , cf. Heracl. 491; δοκεῖ μοι Καρχηδόνα μὴ εἶναι censeo Carthaginem esse delendam, Plu.Cat.Ma.27; ἂν ᾖ τὸ στράτευμα be in existence, D.8.17; of money, to be in hand,

    τῶν ὄντων χρημάτων καὶ τῶν προσιόντων IG12.91.25

    ; τὰ ὄντα property, Pl.Grg. 511a, Plu.Ant.24, etc.; τὸ ἐσόμενον ἐκ .. future revenue from.., BCH46.420 (Olymos, i B. C.); of place, τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν the local church, Act.Ap.13.1; of time, τοῦ ὄντος μηνός in the current month, BGU146.4, etc.; in office,

    ἱερέων τῶν ὄντων PPar.5.4

    (ii B. C.); αἱ οὖσαι [ἐξουσίαι] the powers that be, Ep. Rom.13.1.
    II of the real world, be, opp. become,

    γίγνεται πάντα ἃ δή φαμεν εἶναι Pl.Tht. 152d

    , etc.; τὸ ὄν Being, Parm.8.35, Protag.2, Pl.Ti. 27d, etc.; opp. τὸ μὴ ὄν, Gorg.Fr.3 D., etc.;

    οὐδὲν γίνεται ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος Epicur.Ep. 1p.5U.

    ;

    ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων ἐποίησεν αὐτὰ ὁ θεός LXX 2 Ma.7.28

    ; τὰ ὄντα the world of things, Heraclit.7, Emp.129.5, etc.; ὄνindecl., τῶν ὂν εἰδῶν species of Being, Plot.6.2.10.
    2 of circumstances, events, etc., to happen,

    τά τ' ἐόντα, τά τ' ἐσσόμενα, πρό τ' ἐόντα Il.1.70

    ;

    ἡ ἐσβολὴ ἔμελλεν ἔσεσθαι Th.2.13

    , etc.; τῆς προδοσίας οὔσης since treachery was there, Id.4.103; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ᾖ so long as it last, Id.1.58;

    αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ἔσονται Id.4.118

    ; τί ἐστιν; what is it? what's the matter? Ar.Th. 193; τί οὖν ἦν τοῦτο; how came it to pass? Pl.Phd. 58a: repeated with a relat. to avoid a positive assertion, ἔστι δ' ὅπῃ νῦν ἔ. things are as they are, i.e. are ill, A.Ag.67.
    III be the fact or the case, διπλασίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι ἤ ἐστιν twice as large as it really is, Th.1.10; αὐτὸ ὅ ἐστι καλόν beauty in its essence, Pl.Smp. 211c, cf. Phd. 74b; freq. in part., τὸν ἐόντα λόγον λέγειν or φαίνειν the true story, Hdt.1.95, 116; τῷ ἐόντι χρήσασθαι tell the truth, ib. 30;

    τὰ ὄντα ἀπαγγέλλειν Th.7.8

    ; σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν, λόγον οὐκ ὄντα, S.El. 584, Ar.Ra. 1052; τῷ ὄντι in reality, in fact, Pl.Prt. 328d, etc.; to apply a quotation to a case in point, τῷ ὄντι κλαυσίγελως real 'smiles through tears' (with allusion to Il.6.484), X.HG7.2.9, cf. Pl. La. 196d; κατὰ τὸ ἐόν according to the fact, rightly, Hdt.1.97; πᾶν τὸ ἐόν the whole truth, Id.9.11;

    τοῦ ἐόντος ἀποτεύξεται Hp.VM 2

    .
    IV folld. by the relat., οὐκ ἔστιν ὅς or ὅστις no one,

    οὐκ ἔσθ' ὃς.. ἀπαλάλκοι Il.22.348

    ;

    οὐκ ἔ. οὐδεὶς ὅς E.El. 903

    ; οὐκ ἔ. ὅτῳ, = οὐδενί, A.Pr. 293 (anap.), cf. 989: freq. in pl., εἰσὶν οἵ, = Lat. sunt qui, used exactly like ἔνιοι, Th.6.88, 7.44, Pl.Men. 77d, Grg. 503a, etc. ( εἰσί τινες οἵ .. Th.3.24); ἐστὶν ἃ χωρία, πολίσματα, Id.1.12,65;

    ἐστὶν ἃ εἰπεῖν Id.2.67

    ;

    ἦσαν οἵ X.An.5.2.14

    ; the sg. Verb is used even with masc. and fem. pl., ἐστὶν οἵ, αἵ, Hp.Fract.1, VC4, X.Cyr.2.3.16; more freq. in oblique cases,

    ποταμῶν ἐστὶ ὧν Hdt.7.187

    ;

    ἐστὶν ἀφ' ὧν Th.8.65

    ; ἐστὶ παρ' οἷς, ἐστὶν ἐν οἷς, Id.1.23, 5.25: in questions ὅστις is used, ἔστιν ἥντινα δόξαν.. ἀπεκρίνατο; Pl.Men. 85b: with relat. Particles, ἐστὶν ἔνθα, = Lat. est ubi, X.Cyr.7.4.15, etc.; ἐ. ὅπῃ, ἔσθ' ὅπου, somehow, somewhere, Pl.Prt. 331d, A.Eu. 517, S.OT 448, etc.; in questions expecting a neg. answer, ἐ. ὁπόθεν, ὅπως; Pl.Phlb. 35a, R. 493e, etc.;

    οὐ γάρ ἐσθ' ὅπως Pi.Fr.61

    , cf. Hdt.7.102, A.Ag. 620; οὐκ ἔ. ὅπως οὐ in any case, necessarily, Ar. Pax 188;

    οὐκ ἔ. ὡς Pl. Men. 76e

    , etc.; ἐ. ὅτε, ἔσθ' ὅτε, sometimes, Pi.Fr.180.2, S.Aj.56, Th. 7.21, etc.
    V ἦν is sts. used with pl. masc. and fem., usu. at the beginning of a sentence, there was,

    τῆς δ' ἦν τρεῖς κεφαλαί Hes.Th. 321

    ; (but in

    ἦν δ' ἐρῳδιοί τε πολλοί Epich.46

    , cf. 59, al., it may be taken as [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl.);

    ἦν δ' ἀμφίπλεκτοι κλίμακες S.Tr. 520

     (lyr.); ἦν ἄρα κἀκεῖνοι ταλακάρδιοι Epigr. ap. Aeschin.3.184; less freq.

    ἔστι, ἔστι δὲ μεταξὺ.. ἑπτὰ στάδιοι Hdt.1.26

    , cf. 7.34;

    ἔστι.. ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος Pl.R. 463a

    ; before dual Nouns, Ar.V.58, Pl.Grg. 500d.
    VI ἔστι impers., c. inf., it is possible,

    ἔστι γὰρ ἀμφοτέροισιν ὀνείδεα μυθήσασθαι Il.20.246

    ;

    ἔστι μὲν εὕδειν, ἔστι δὲ τερπομένοισιν ἀκούειν Od. 15.392

    ; εἴ τί πού ἐστι (sc. πιθέσθαι) 4.193;

    τοιάδε.. ἐστὶν ἀκοῦσαι A. Pr. 1055

     (anap.);

    ἔστι τεκμήρια ὁρᾶν X.An.3.2.13

    , cf. Ar.Ra. 1163, Aeschin.3.105, D.18.272, Arist.Ath.53.6, etc.; so in imper., opt., and subj.,

    ἔστω ἀποφέρεσθαι τῷ βουλομένῳ IG12.10.7

    ;

    μυρία ἂν εἴη λέγειν Pl.Plt. 271e

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν ᾖ δρᾶν IG2.1054.91

    : more freq. in neg. clauses, Il.6.267, etc.; folld. by ὥστε c. inf., S.Ph. 656: c. acc. et inf.,

    ἁδόντα δ' εἴη με τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς ὁμιλεῖν Pi.P.2.96

    ;

    ἔστιν ἐκπεσεῖν ἀρχῆς Δία A.Pr. 757

    : sts. not impers. in this sense,

    θάλασσα δ' οὐκέτ' ἦν ἰδεῖν Id.Pers. 419

    .
    B most freq., to be, the Copula connecting the predicate with the Subject, both being in the same case: hence, signify, import,

    τὸ γὰρ εἴρειν λέγειν ἐστίν Pl.Cra. 398d

    ; esp. in the phrase τοῦτ' ἔστι, hoc est;

    Σκαιόλαν, ὅπερ ἐστὶ Λαϊόν Plu.Publ.17

    : with numerals, τὰ δὶς πέντε δέκα ἐστίν twice five are ten, X.Mem.4.4.7; εἶναί τις or τι, to be somebody, something, be of some consequence, v. τις; οὐδὲν εἶναι Pl.R. 562d, etc.
    2 periphr. with the Participle to represent the finite Verb: with [tense] pf. part. once in Hom., τετληότες εἰμέν, for τετλήκαμεν, Il.5.873; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦν τεθνηκώς, for ἐτεθνήκει, A. Ag. 869; ἔσται δεδορκώς ib. 1179;

    εἰμὶ γεγώς S.Aj. 1299

    ;

    πεφυκός ἐστι Ar.Av. 1473

    ;

    δεδρακότες εἰσίν Th.3.68

    ;

    κατακεκονότες ἔσεσθε X.An.7.6.36

    : with [tense] aor. part., once in Hom.,

    βλήμενος ἦν Il.4.211

    ; so προδείσας εἰμί, οὐ σιωπήσας ἔσει; S.OT90, 1146, cf. A.Supp. 460: with [tense] pres. part.,

    ἦν προκείμενον Id.Pers. 371

    ;

    φεύγων Ὀρέστης ἐστίν Id.Ch. 136

    ;

    εἴην οὐκ ἂν εὖ φρονῶν S.Aj. 1330

    ; τί δ' ἐστί.. φέρον; Id.OT 991, cf. 274, 708;

    λέγων ἐστίν τις E.Hec. 1179

    ;

    ἦν τίς σ' ὑβρίζων Id.HF 313

    ;

    πόρρω ἤδη εἶ πορευόμενος Pl.Ly. 204b

    ;

    βαδίζων εἰμί Ar.Ra. 36

    ; freq. in Hdt.,

    ἦσαν ἱέντες 1.57

    , al.; even

    εἰσὶ διάφοροι ἐόντες 3.49

     (s.v.l.):— if the Art. is joined with the Part., the noun is made emphatic, Κᾶρές εἰσι οἱ καταδέξαντες the persons who showed her were Carians, Id.1.171;

    αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ μαρτυρῶν A.Eu. 798

    ;

    δόλος ἦν ὁ φράσας S.El. 197

     (anap.).
    C εἶναι is freq. modified in sense by the addition of Advbs., or the cases of Nouns without or with Preps.:
    I εἶναι with Advbs., where the Adv. often merely represents a Noun and stands as the predicate,

    ἅλις δέ οἱ ἦσαν ἄρουραι Il.14.122

    , etc.; ἀκέων, ἀκήν εἶναι, to be silent, 4.22, Od.2.82;

    σῖγα πᾶς ἔστω λεώς E.Hec. 532

    ;

    διαγνῶναι χαλεπῶς ἦν ἄνδρα ἕκαστον Il.7.424

    ; ἀσφαλέως ἡ κομιδὴ ἔσται will go on safely, Hdt.4.134; ἐγγύς, πόρρω εἶναι, Th.6.88, Pl.Prt. 356e: freq. impers. with words implying good or ill fortune, Κουρήτεσσι κακῶς ἦν it fared ill with them, Il.9.551;

    εὖ γὰρ ἔσται E.Med.89

    , cf. Ar.Pl. 1188, etc.;

    ἡδέως ἂν αὐτοῖς εἴη D.59.30

    .
    II c. gen., to express descent or extraction,

    πατρὸς δ' εἴμ' ἀγαθοῖο Il.21.109

    ;

    αἵματός εἰς ἀγαθοῖο Od. 4.611

    , cf. Hdt.3.71, Th.2.71, etc.;

    πόλεως μεγίστης εἶ X.An.7.3.19

    .
    d to express that a thing belongs to another,

    Τροίαν Ἀχαιῶν οὖσαν A.Ag. 269

    ;

    τὸ πεδίον ἦν μέν κοτε Χορασμίων Hdt.3.117

    , etc.: hence, to be of the party of,

    ἦσαν.. τινὲς μὲν φιλίππου, τινὲς δὲ τοῦ βελτίστου D.9.56

    , cf. 37.53; to be de pendent upon, S.Ant. 737, etc.; to be at the mercy of,

    ἔστι τοῦ λέγοντος, ἢν φόβους λέγῃ Id.OT 917

    .
    e to express one's duty, business, custom, nature, and the like , οὔτοι γυναικός ἐστι 'tis not a woman's part, A.Ag. 940;

    τὸ ἐπιτιμᾶν παντὸς εἶναι D.1.16

    ; τὸ δὲ ναυτικὸν τέχνης ἐστίν is matter of art, requires art, Th.1.142, cf.83.
    III with the dat., ἐστί μοι I have, freq. in Hom., etc.
    3 with ἄσμενος, βουλόμενος, etc., added, ἐμοὶ δέ κεν ἀσμένῳ εἴη 'twould be to my delight, Il.14.108;

    οὐκ ἂν σφίσι βουλομένοις εἶναι Th.7.35

    ;

    προσδεχομένῳ Id.6.46

    ;

    θέλοντι S.OT 1356

     (lyr.);

    ἡδομένοις Pl.La. 187c

    .
    IV with Preps., εἶναι ἀπό τινος, = εἶναί τινος (supr. 11.a), X.Mem.1.6.9;

    εἰσὶν ἀπ' ἐναντίων αὗται πραγμάτων Pl.Phlb. 12d

    ; but εἶναι ἀπ' οἴκου to be away from.., Th.1.99.
    2 εἶναι ἔκ τινος to be sprung from, εἴμ' ἐκ Παιονίης, Μυρμιδόνων ἔξ εἰμι, Il.21.154, 24.397, etc.; ἔστιν ἐξ ἀνάγκης it is of necessity, i. e. necessary, Pl.Sph. 256d.
    3 εἶναι ἐν .. to be in a certain state,

    ἐν εὐπαθείῃσι Hdt.1.22

    ; ἐν ἀθυμία, etc., Th.6.46, etc.;

    ἐν ταραχαῖς D.18.218

    ; εἶναι ἐν ἀξιώματι to be in esteem, Th.1.130; οἱ ἐν τέλεϊ ἐόντες those in office, Hdt.3.18, etc.; but εἶναι ἐν τέχνῃ, ἐν φιλοσοφία to be engaged in.., S.OT 562, Pl.Phd. 59a.
    b ἐν σοί ἐστι it depends on thee, Hdt.6.109, S.Ph. 963;

    ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Id.OT 314

    ; so also

    ἐπί τινι Id.Ph. 1003

    , X.Cyr.1.6.2, etc.
    4 εἶναι διά .., much like εἶναι ἐν .., εἶναι διὰ φόβου, = φοβεῖσθαι, Th.6.34; εἶναι δι' ὄχλου, = ὀχληρὸν εἶναι, Id.1.73;

    εἶναι διὰ μόχθων X.Cyr.1.6.25

    ; εἶναι δι' αἰτίας, = αἰτιᾶσθαι, D.H.1.70; Geom., pass through,

    διὰ τᾶς ἑτέρας διαμέτρου ἐόντος τοῦ ἐπιπέδου Archim.Con.Sph.20

    .
    6 εἶναι πρός τινος to be in one's favour, Th.4.10,29, etc.; to suit, X.An. 1.2.11, etc.; εἶναι πρός τινι engaged in, Pl.Phd. 84c, Philostr.VA5.31; πρὸς τοῖς ἰδίοις mind one's own affairs, Arist.Pol. 1309a6, Ath.16.3;

    εἶναι πρὸς τὸ κωλύειν Plb.1.26.3

    ; πρὸς τὸ πονεῖν Telesp.46 H.;

    εἶναι περί τι X.An.3.5.7

    , etc.
    7 εἶναι παρά τινι or τινα, = παρειναι, Id.Cyr.6.2.15, Hdt.8.140.ά (s.v.l.).
    8 εἶναι ὑπό τινα or τινι to be subject to.., X.HG5.2.17 (s.v.l.), 6.2.4.
    9 περὶ τούτων ἐστίν that is the question, Men.Epit.30.
    10 εἶναι ἀπό .., in Geom., to be constructed upon, Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.9, Con.Sph.7.
    D ἐστί is very freq. omitted, mostly in the [tense] pres. ind. before certain predicates, as ἀνάγκη, ἄξιον, δυνατόν, εἰκός, ἕτοιμον, οἷόν τε, ῥᾴδιον, χρεών, etc., and after the neut. of Verbals in - τέος, and such forms as θαυμαστὸν ὅσον: less freq. with other persons and moods, εἰμί omitted, S.OT92, Aj. 813; εἶ, Od.4.206; ἐσμέν, S.Ant. 634; ἐστέ, Od.10.463; εἰσί, S.OT 499 (lyr.), IG2.778 B; subj. ᾖ, Il.14.376, E.Hipp. 659, Antipho 5.32; opt. εἴη, IG22.1183.12; [tense] impf. ἦν, ib.2.778 B; [tense] fut. ἔσονται, Od.14.394.
    E the Inf. freq. seems redundant,
    1 in phrases implying power or will to do a thing, ἑκὼν εἶναι (v. ἑκών)

    κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι Is.2.32

    ;

    εἰς δύναμιν εἶναι Pl.Plt. 300c

    ; τὸ ἐπ' ἐκείνοις εἶναι, quantum in illis esset, Th.8.48, X.HG3.5.9, cf. Lys.13.58;

    τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28

    ;

    τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι X.An.1.6.9

    ;

    κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι Pl.Prt. 317a

    ; τὸ τήμερον, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, Id.Cra. 396e, La. 201c, Theopomp. Com.98, Decr. ap. Arist.Ath.31.2, etc.
    F [tense] impf. ἦνissts. used where other languages take the [tense] pres.,
    1 after ἄρα, to express a fact which is and has always been the same, δέρμα δὲ ἀνθρώπου.. ἦν ἄρα σχεδὸν δερμάτων πάντων λαμπρότατον human skin then it appears is.., Hdt.4.64;

    Κύπρις οὐκ ἄρ' ἦν θεός E. Hipp. 359

    ; ὡς ἄρ' ἦσθ' ἐμὸς πατὴρ ὀρθῶς ib. 1169;

    ἦ πολύμοχθον ἄρ' ἦν γένος.. ἁμερίων Id.IA 1330

    ;

    ἦ στωμύλος ἦσθα Theoc.5.79

    ; so also when there is reference to a past thought, τουτὶ τί ἦν; what is this? Ar.Ach. 157, cf. Pl.Cra. 387c: so in the Aristotelian formula τὸ τί ἦν εἶναι (APo.82b38, al.), used to express the essential nature of a thing, where τί ἦν (for ἐστί) takes the place of the dat. in such phrases as τὸ ἀγαθῷ εἶναι, τὸ μεγέθει εἶναι, APr.67b12, de An.429b10.
    G ἐγώ εἰμι, in LXX, pleonastic for

    ἐγώ, ἐγώ εἰμι οὐχ ἥμαρτον Jd. 11.27

    , cf. 6.18; also

    ἔσται πᾶς ἀποκτενεῖ με Ge.4.14

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > εἰμί

  • 17 φοβέω

    φοβέω (φέβομαι ‘flee in terror’; Hom. et al.; Wsd 17:9; Jos., Ant. 14, 456), in our lit. only pass. φοβέομαι (Hom.+; OGI 669, 59; SIG 1268 II, 17; pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., Just.; Mel., P. 98, 746 al.; Ath. 20, 2; R. 21 p. 75, 1) impf. ἐφοβούμην; 1 fut. φοβηθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐφοβήθην (Plut., Brut. 1002 [40, 9]; M. Ant. 9, 1, 7; Jer 40:9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 277; s. B-D-F §79).
    ① to be in an apprehensive state, be afraid, the aor. oft. in the sense become frightened
    ⓐ intr., abs. (Iren. 1, 4, 2 [Harv. I 36, 4]) ἐφοβήθησαν σφόδρα they were terribly frightened (Ex 14:10; 1 Macc 12:52) Mt 17:6; 27:54. ἐπεστράφην φοβηθείς I turned around in terror Hv 4, 3, 7.—Mt 9:8; 14:30; 25:25; Mk 5:33; Ac 16:38. ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ for they were afraid Mk 16:8 (Mk 16:9–20 is now rarely considered a part of the original gospel of Mk, though many scholars doubt that the gosp. really ended w. the words ἐφ. γάρ. The original ending may have been lost; among the possible reasons given are the accidental loss of the last page of Mark’s own first copy [the same defect, at a very early stage, in the case of the 18th book of the Κεστοί of Jul. Africanus: WBauer, Orthodoxy etc. (Engl. tr. of 2d German ed. ’64) ’71, 159ff. S. also FKenyon, Papyrus Rolls and the Ending of St. Mk: JTS 40, ’39, 56f; CRoberts, The Ancient Book and the Ending of St. Mk: ibid. 253–57] or by purposeful suppression, perh. because it may have deviated fr. the other accounts of the resurrection [for the purposeful omission of the end of a document cp. Athen. 4, 61, 166d on the 10th book of Theopompus’ Philippica, ἀφʼ ἧς τινες τὸ τελευταῖον μέρος χωρίσαντες, ἐν ᾧ ἐστιν τὰ περὶ τῶν δημαγωγῶν. S. also Diog. L. 7, 34: a report of Isidorus of Pergamum on the systematic mutilation of books in the library there by Athenodorus the Stoic].—Those who conclude that nothing ever came after ἐφ. γάρ must either assume that the evangelist was prevented fr. finishing his work [Zahn et al.], or indeed intended to close the book w. these words [s. γάρ 1a]. For a short sentence, composed of a verb + γάρ s. also Epict. 3, 9, 19; 4, 8, 4; Artem. 4, 64; 1, 33 p. 35, 6; Plotinus, Ennead 5, 5, a treatise ending in γάρ [PvanderHorst, JTS 23, ’72, 121–24]; Musonius Rufus, Tr. XII; Oenomaus in Eus., PE 6, 7, 8; Libanius, Or. 53 p. 65, 20 F.; PMich 149 VI, 37 [II A.D.]. Among those favoring an ending w. γάρ: Wlh., Loisy, Lohmeyer ad loc.; ABauer, WienerStud 34, 1912, 306ff; LBrun, D. Auferst. Christi 1925, 10ff; OLinton, ThBl 8, 1929, 229–34; JCreed, JTS 31, 1930, 175–80; MGoguel, La foi à la résurr. de Jésus ’33, 176ff; HMosbech, Mkevangeliets Slutning: SEÅ 5, ’40, 56–73; WAllen, JTS 47, ’46, 46–49 [‘feel reverential awe’]; ibid. 48, ’47, 201–3. S. also EGoodspeed, Exp. 8th ser., 18, 1919, 155–60; reconstruction of the ‘lost’ ending, in Engl., by Goodsp. in his Introd. to the NT ’37, 156; HProbyn, Exp. 9th ser., 4, 1925, 120–25; RKevin, JBL 45, 1926, 81–103; MEnslin, ibid. 46, 1927, 62–68; HCadbury, ibid. 344f; MRist, ATR 14, ’32, 143–51; WKnox, HTR 35, ’42, 13ff; EHelzle, Der Schluss des Mk, ’59, diss. Tübingen; FDanker, CTM 38, ’67, 26f; JLuzarraga, Biblica 50, ’69, 497–510; KAland, MBlack Festschr., ’69, 157–80, NTEntwürfe, ’79, 246–83). φοβοῦμαι μᾶλλον I am all the more fearful IPhld 5:1. μὴ φοβηθῆτε do not be afraid Mt 10:31 v.l. (μή 1cεא). μὴ φοβοῦ, μὴ φοβεῖσθε you must no longer be afraid, stop being afraid (μή 1cγא) Mt 10:31; 14:27; 17:7; Mk 5:36; Lk 1:13, 30; 2:10; 5:10; 8:50; 12:7 al. LKöhler, D. Offenbarungsformel ‘Fürchte dich nicht!’: SchTZ 36, 1919, 33ff.—W. acc. of inner obj. (B-D-F §153; Rob. 468; Pla., Prot. 360b; Ael. Aristid. 30 p. 586 D.: φοβοῦμαι φόβον; Did., Gen. 230, 1; on LXX usage s. Johannessohn, Kasus 73) ὁ φόβος ὸ̔ν δεῖ σε φοβηθῆναι the fear which you must have Hm 7:1c. ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν (Jon 1:10; 1 Macc 10:8; TestAbr. B 13 p. 117, 17f [Stone p. 82]; JosAs 6:1) they were very much afraid Mk 4:41; Lk 2:9. If the nouns are to be taken in the pass. sense, this is also the place for τὸν φόβον αὐτῶν (objective gen.) μὴ φοβηθῆτε 1 Pt 3:14 (cp. Is 8:12) and μὴ φοβούμεναι μηδεμίαν πτόησιν vs. 6 (πτόησις 2); s. 1bγ below.—A recognizable Hellenic expr. (cp. ὁ ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων φόβος=fear in the face of the enemy), though encouraged by OT usage (Lev 26:2; Dt 1:29; Jer 1:8, 17; Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 8:12; En 106:4; Helbing 29; B-D-F §149; Rob. 577) φοβ. ἀπό τινος be afraid of someone Mt 10:28a; Lk 12:4; 1 Cl 56:11 (Job 5:22).—Foll. by gen. absol. 56:10. Foll. by μή and the aor. subj. to denote that which one fears (Thu. 1, 36, 1; Aesop, Fab. 317 H.=356a P.; Alex. Aphr. 31, II/2 p. 203, 20 τὸν Ἀπόλλω φοβεῖσθαι μή τι παρελθῇ τούτων ἄπρακτον=Apollo is concerned [almost as much as ‘sees to it’] that nothing of this remains undone; Jos., Ant. 10, 8, Vi. 252) Ac 23:10; 27:17; ITr 5:1; Hs 9, 20, 2. Foll. by μήποτε (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 4 Jac. p. 1172, 30 φοβοῦμαι περὶ ὑμῶν, μήποτε; JosAs 7:3; ApcMos 16 al.): Hm 12, 5, 3. φοβηθῶμεν μήποτε δοκῇ τις Hb 4:1; μήπου (v.l. μήπως; ParJer 5:5) Ac 27:29; 2 Cor 11:3; 12:20. A notable feature is the prolepsis of the obj. (cp. Soph., Oed. R. 767; Thu. 4, 8, 7) φοβοῦμαι ὑμᾶς μήπως εἰκῇ κεκοπίακα εἰς ὑμᾶς I am afraid my work with you may be wasted Gal 4:11 (B-D-F §476, 3; Rob. 423).—W. inf. foll. be afraid to do or shrink from doing someth. (B-D-F §392, 1b.—X., An. 1, 3, 17 al.; Gen 19:30; 26:7; ApcMos 10:18) Mt 1:20; 2:22; Mk 9:32; Lk 9:45; 2 Cl 5:1.—φοβεῖσθαι abs. in the sense take care (Just., D. 78, 4) πλέον φοβεῖσθαι be more careful than usually ITr 4:1.
    ⓑ trans. fear someone or someth.
    α. pers. τινά someone (X., An. 3, 2, 19 al.; PGM 4, 2171; Num 21:34; Dt 3:2; Jos., Ant. 13, 26; Just., D. 83, 1) μὴ φοβηθῆτε αὐτούς Mt 10:26. Ἡρῴδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν Ἰωάννην Mt 6:20. τοὺς Ἰουδαίους J 9:22.—Gal 2:12; 2:5b (saying of Jesus). God (Did., Gen. 64, 15; Theoph. Ant. 1, 14 [p. 92, 11]) Mt 10:28b; Lk 12:5abc; 23:40; 2:5c (saying of Jesus). The crowd Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46; Mk 11:32; 12:12; Lk 20:19; 22:2; Ac 5:26 (foll. by μή). τὴν ἐξουσίαν (ἐξουσία 5a) Ro 13:3. The angel of repentance Hm 12, 4, 1; Hs 6, 2, 5. The Christian is to have no fear of the devil Hm 7:2a; 12, 4, 6f; 12, 5, 2.
    β. animals (in imagery) μὴ φοβείσθωσαν τὰ ἀρνία τοὺς λύκους 2:5a (saying of Jesus, fr. an unknown source).
    γ. things τὶ someth. (X., Hell. 4, 4, 8 al.; En 103:4; ApcEsdr 7:2 τὸν θάνατον; Just., D. 1, 5 κόλασιν; Ath., R. 21 p. 75, 1 οὐδέν; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 90; 2, 232) τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως Hb 11:23. τὸν θυμὸν τοῦ βασιλέως vs. 27. τὴν κρίσιν 2 Cl 18:2. τὸν ὄντως θάνατον Dg 10:7. φοβοῦμαι τὴν ὑμῶν ἀγάπην, μὴ … IRo 1:2. τὰ ὅπλα (in imagery) Hm 12, 2, 4.—1 Pt 3:14 and 6 belong here if the nouns in them are to be taken in an act. sense; s. 1a above.—Fear, avoid, shun τὶ someth. (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 41, 9 Δαρεῖος τὸ ἅρμα φοβηθείς) τὴν πλάνην τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν B 12:10. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ διαβόλου Hm 7:3ac.—AVStröm, Der Hirt des Hermas, Allegorie oder Wirklichkeit? Ntl. Sem. Uppsala 3, ’36.
    ② to have a profound measure of respect for, (have) reverence, respect, w. special ref. to fear of offending
    ⓐ God: fear (differently 1bα) in the sense reverence (Aeschyl., Suppl. 893 δαίμονας; Isocr. 1, 16 τοὺς μὲν θεοὺς φοβοῦ, τοὺς δὲ γονεῖς τίμα; Pla., Leg. 11, 927a; Lysias 9, 17; 32, 17; Plut., De Superstit. 2, 165b; LXX; PsSol 4:21; TestJob 43:9 [τὸν κύριον]; JosAs 2:5 [deities]; Philo, Migr. Abr. 21 [after Gen 42:18]. Cp. PTebt 59, 10 [II B.C.] φοβεῖσθαι καὶ σέβεσθαι τὸ ἱερόν) Lk 1:50 (anticipates the οἱ φοβούμενοι in Ac: H-JKlauck, NTS 43, ’97, 134–39); 18:2, 4 (was Ex 23:1–3 his motto: even God could not bribe him?); Ac 10:35; 1 Pt 2:17; Rv 14:7; 19:5; 1 Cl 21:7; 23:1; 28:1; 45:6; B 10:10f (τὸν κύριον); 19:2, 7; Hm 1:2; 7:1, 4f; Hs 5, 1, 5; 8, 11, 2; D 4:10. Also τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ (2 Esdr 11) Rv 11:18.—φοβούμενοι τὸν θεόν as a t.t.=σεβόμενοι τὸν θεόν (σέβω 1b; t.t. disputed by MWilcox, JSNT 13, ’81, 102–22; cp. TFinn, CBQ 47, ’85, 75–84; ILevinskaya, The Book of Acts in Its Diaspora Setting [BAFCS V] ’96, 51–126; BWander, Gottesfürchtige und Sympathisanten [WUNT 104] ’98, esp. 80–86; 180–203) Ac 13:16, 26 (Just., D. 10, 4 al.; sing. 10:2, 22).—τὸν κύριον (PsSol 2:33; 3:12 al.; JosAs 8:9) Christ: Col 3:22.—WAllen (s. 1a above) interprets Mk 16:8 to mean reverence for the divine.
    ⓑ pers. who command respect (Plut., Galba 1054 [3, 4]; Herodian 3, 13, 2; Lev 19:3 φοβ. πατέρα καὶ μητέρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 345): of a wife ἵνα φοβῆται τὸν ἄνδρα Eph 5:33. τὸν ἐπίσκοπον IEph 6:1.—RAC VIII 661–99; TRE XI 756–59; Schmidt, Syn. III 507–36. DELG s.v. φέβομαι II. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φοβέω

  • 18 φθάνω

    φθάνω, Il.9.506, [tense] impf.
    A

    ἔφθανον X.HG6.2.30

    , AP9.272 ([place name] Bianor): [tense] fut.

    φθήσομαι Il.23.444

    , Th.5.10, Pl.R. 375c, etc.; but φθάσω [ᾰ] Hp. Morb.3.13 (s. v. l.), X.Cyr.5.4.38: [tense] aor.

    ἔφθᾰσα Hdt.7.161

    , A.Pers. 752 (troch.), Th.3.49, X.Cyr.7.1.19, etc.; imper.

    φθάσον J.AJ6.11.7

    ; opt. [ per.] 3sg.

    φθάσειε Isoc.8.120

    , pl.

    φθάσειαν X.HG7.2.14

     (this tense prevails in later Gk., Plb.3.66.1, etc.); [dialect] Dor.

    ἔφθασσα Theoc.2.115

    : but the only [dialect] Ep. [tense] aor. is ἔφθην, not found in A. or S., but the more usual form in E. and Ar., less freq. in Th., X., D.; pl. ἔφθημεν, -ητε, -ησαν, E.Ph. 1468, Isoc.5.7, Antipho 2.2.5, [dialect] Ep.pl.3

    φθάν Il.11.51

    ; subj. φθῶ, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. φθήῃ, φθῇσιν, 16.861, 23.805; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 1pl.

    φθέωμεν Od.16.383

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    φθέωσι 24.437

    ; opt. φθαίην, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3sg. φθαίησι ([etym.] παρα-) Il.10.346; inf.

    φθῆναι Hdt.6.115

    , Th.4.4; part.

    φθάς Hdt.3.71

    ; [dialect] Ep. part. [voice] Med.

    φθάμενος Il.5.119

    , al., Hes.Op. 554: [tense] pf. ἔφθᾰκα Philipp. ap. D.18.39, LXX 2 Ch.28.9, IG12 9).906.26 (Chalcis, iii A. D.);

    πέφθακα Ps.-Callisth. 2.10

     (v. l): [tense] plpf.

    ἐφθάκει Plu.Galb. 17

    , Luc.Philops.6:—[voice] Pass., Arist.Mu. 395a18: [tense] impf.

    ἐφθάνετο AP9.278

     ([place name] Bianor);

    ἐφθάνοντο J.BJ5.2.4

     (v.l. ἐφονεύοντο): [tense] aor.

    ἐφθάσθην D.H. 6.25

    , Epigr.Gr. 315 ([place name] Smyrna), IPE2.197 (Panticapaeum, ii A. D.), J.AJ8.12.4. Gal.4.560. [[pron. full] φθᾰνω always in [dialect] Att. (so also in AP9.272 ([place name] Bianor), APl.4.382, 384); φθᾱνω in Il.9.506, 21.262 (where Zenod. read φθανέει for φθάνει) ]:— come or do first or before others:
    I c. acc. pers., to be beforehand with, overtake, outstrip, in running or otherwise,

    φθάνει δέ τε καὶ τὸν ἄγοντα Il.21.262

    ;

    φθῆ σε τελος θανάτοιο 11.451

    , cf. Hes.Op. 554, 570, Hdt.7.161, E.Heracl. 120, IT 669, Isoc.9.42, etc.;

    οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 Ep.Thess.4.15

    ; so ἔφθησαν τὸν χειμῶνα they anticipated the storm, Hdt.7.188;

    φθάσας τὸν λογισμόν D.21.38

    :—[voice] Pass., to be overtaken,

    ὑπό τινος Arist. Mu. 395a18

    , AP9.278 ([place name] Bianor); ἐφθάσθην (v. supr.).
    II abs., come or act first, opp. ὑστερέω or ὑστερίζω, E.Ph. 975, X.An.6.1.18, cf. Th.4.121; τοῦ φθάσαντος ἁρπαγή the prey of the first comer, A.Pers. 752 (troch.), cf. Fr.23 (lyr.);

    πρὶν ἐλθεῖν αὐτοὺς φθάσαι βουλόμενοι Th.7.36

    ;

    μὴ φθάσῃ ἐς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἐσπλεύσας Id.8

    , 100;

    φθάσαι πρὶν ἀδικηθῆναι Arist.Pol. 1302b23

    , cf. Rh. 1373a23; in later writers, τὰ φθάσαντα the things before mentioned, Ael.VH 1.34, Arg.D.46; part. φθάνων, φθάσας previous,

    τῶν φθασάντων δυεῖν βιβλίων Porph.Abst.3.1

    ; ἐν τοῖς φθάνουσιν ἔργοις Dex.Hist.Fr. 26 J.;

    τοῖς φθάνουσι κατορθώμασι Id.Fr.6

     J.;

    οἱ φθάσαντες πόνοι Agath.5.16

    ;

    τὸ φθάνον

     previous time,

    Ael.VH14.6

    ; τὸ φθάσαν, τὰ φθάσαντα, the past, Agath.3.2, al., Procop.Gaz.Ep.32;

    ὁ φθάσας χρόνος Men.

     Prot.p.127 D.
    2 with Preps., come or arrive first,

    ἕως τῶν οὐρανῶν LXX 2 Ch.28.9

    ;

    ἔφθασεν ἐφ' ὑμᾶς Ev.Matt.12.28

    , Ev.Luc.11.20, cf. 1 Ep.Thess.2.16: φ. εἰς .., simply, arriveat, attain to, Ep.Rom.9.31, Ep.Phil.3.16, Plu.2.338a;

    φθάσομεν εἰς Πηλούσι<ον> PPar.18.14

     (ii A. D.): abs., of Time, arrive, καιρὸς τῆς τομῆς ἔφθακε (v.l. ἔφθασεν) LXXCa. 2.12; ἔφθασεν ὁ μὴν ὁ ἕβδομος ib.2 Es.3.1.
    b extend,

    μέχρι γῆς Plot.3.27

    ;

    εἰς βορρᾶν PFlor.50.87

     (iii A. D.).
    c reach,

    αἰθέρα APl.4.384

    .
    d Gramm., to be applied or applicable,

    ἐπ' ἀμφοτέρας τὰς διαθέσεις A.D.Synt.211.22

    , cf. 217.23, al.
    III the action in which one is beforehand is expressed by the part. agreeing with the subject, [Ἄτη] πολλὸν ὑπεκπροθέει, φθάνει δέ τε πᾶσαν ἐπ' αἶαν βλάπτουσ' ἀνθρώπους and is beforehand in doing men mischief, Il.9.506; ἀλλ' ἄρα μιν φθῆ Τηλέμαχος κατόπισθε βαλών Telemachus was beforehand with him in striking, i.e. struck first, Od.22.91, cf. 16.383, Il.10.368;

    ἔφθασέν με προαπελθὼν Χάρμος PCair.Zen.16.3

     (iii B. C.); ἔφθησαν ἀπικόμενοι arrived first, Hdt.4.136, cf. 6.115; so φ. εὐεργετῶν to be the first to show a kindness, X.Mem.2.3.14;

    ὅπως φθάσειαν βοηθήσαντες Id.HG7.2.14

    ;

    ἔφθασαν προκαταλαβόντες Th.3.112

    ;

    φθάνουσιν αὐτοὺς προκαταφυγοῦσαι Id.2.91

    ;

    ἢν φθάσωσιν πρότερον διαφθείραντες τὸ στράτευμα Id.7.25

    ;

    φ. γόνασι προσπεσὼν πατρός E.HF 986

    , etc: part. [voice] Pass. is also used, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη πόλις ἁλοῦσα, i.e. it would be taken first, Il.13.815; εἴ κε φθήῃ τυπείς shall be wounded first, 16.861; φθαίητε γὰρ ἂν.. ἐξανδραποδισθέντες ἣ .. Hdt.6.108;

    μὴ φθάσωσι προεπιβουλευόμενοι Th.3.83

    ;

    ἔφθη κατακωλυθείς X.HG1.6.17

    ; φθάνειν δεῖ πεφραγμένους τοὶς πόρους they must first be blocked up, Id.Cyr.2.4.25: these clauses, being compar. in sense, are folld. by a gen., φθὰν δὲ μέγ' ἱππήων.. κοσμηθέντες were drawn up before the drivers, Il.11.51; more freq. by πρὶν .. or

    ἢ.., ἔφθη ὀρεξάμενος, πρὶν οὐτάσαι 16.322

    , cf. Antipho1.29, X. Cyr.3.2.4;

    φθήσονται τούτοισι πόδες καὶ γοῦνα καμόντα ἢ ὑμῖν Il.23.444

    ;

    ἔφθης πεζὸς ἰὼν ἢ ἐγὼ σὺν νηΐ Od.11.58

    ; ἔφθησαν ἀναβάντες πρὶν ἢ .. Hdt.9.70; ἔφθησαν ἐκπεσόντες πρότερον ἢ .. Id.6.91.
    b in later Gr., c. part. to express previous action or happening, φθάνω ὑμῖν πρότερον γεγραφηκώς I have already written to you, POxy.1666.3 (iii A. D.), cf. 237 vi30 (ii A. D.), etc.;

    ἔφθασα εἰρηκώς Luc.Pisc.29

    ;

    ὡς ἔφθην εἰπών Id.Par.3

    ; cf. 111.2b.
    2 in the same sense, part. φθάς or φθάσας, [dialect] Ep. φθάμενος, is used like an Adv. with a principal Verb, ὅς μ' ἔβαλε φθάμενος, for ὅς μ' ἔφθη βαλών, Il.5.119, cf. 13.387, Od. 19.449; οὐκ ἄλλος φθὰς ἐμεῦ κατήγορος ἔσται no other shall be an accuser before me, Hdt.3.71; ἀνέῳξάς με φθάσας you opened the door before me, Ar.Pl. 1102;

    φθάσας προσπεσοῦμαι Th.5.9

    , cf. 2.91, X.Cyr. 1.5.3, etc.; even with a part.,

    φθάσας.. ἁρπάσας Hdt.6.65

    ; rarely part. [tense] pres.,

    φθάνοντες δῃοῦμεν X.Cyr.3.3.18

    .
    3 rarely c. inf., ὁ φθάσας θαρσῆσαι he that first gains confidence, Th.3.82; σπεύδειν ὅπως.. φθαίης ἔτ' εἰς ἐκκλησίαν ἐλθεῖν (v.l. ἐλθών ) hurry to be in time to get to.., Ar.Eq. 935 (lyr.), cf. Nu. 1384 (v. infr. IV. 1); μόλις φθάνει θρόνοισιν ἐμπεσοῦσα μὴ χαμαὶ πεσεῖν hardly manages by falling first on the seat not to fall on the ground, E.Med. 1169; more freq. in later writers, of actions which one manages to do, does before or has done first or already, A.R.1.1189, D.H.4.59,61, Sor.1.111, Gal.15.2,93, Luc. DMort.13.2, Harm.2;

    ἐὰν φθάσω πρὸ τῆς τρύγης ἀνελθεῖν PSI8.971.10

     (iii/iv A. D.);

    ἐὰν ὁ ἰατρὸς αὐτὸ φθάσῃ κενῶσαι Gal.16.499

    ; φθάνοντος ἤδη πυρέττειν ἐκ τεττάρων ἡμερῶν τοῦ νοσοῦντος having already begun, ib.498; μὴ φθάνων προσηκόντως τρέφεσθαι if he is not first suitably nourished, Id.18(2).36, cf. 84,103; συμβαίνει φθάνειν ἀποθνῄσκειν τοὺς νεωτέρους the young die first, ib.222; εἰ φθάσαιμεν παλαιοὺς πίθους ἔχειν μεγάλους if we already have.., Gp.6.3.11, cf. 10.22.2, al., A.D.Pron.90.1;

    ἔφθακεν οὖν ταῦτα ἐψηφίσθαι καὶ τῇ βουλῇ IG12(9).906.26

     (Chalcis, iii A. D.).
    IV with negatives,
    1 with οὐ and part. (inf. is v. l. in Ar.Nu. 1384), folld. by καί or καὶ εὐθύς, of two actions following close on each other, οὐ φθάνειν χρὴ συσκιάζοντας γένυν καὶ.. ὁρμᾶν you must no sooner get your beard than you march, E.Supp. 1219; οὐ φθάνει ἐξαγόμενος καὶ εὐθὺς ὅμοιός ἐστι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις no sooner is he brought out than he becomes unclean, X.Eq.5.10, cf. Ar.Nu. 1384; οὐκ ἔφθημεν εἰς Τροιζῆν' ἐλθόντες καὶ τοιαύταις νόσοις ἐλήφθημεν ἐξ ὧν .. no sooner had we come to Troezen than.., Isoc.19.22, cf. 5.53, 8.98, 9.53; οὐκ ἔφθη μοι συμβᾶσα ἡ ἀτυχία καὶ εὐθὺς ἐπεχείρησαν διαφορῆσαι τἄνδοθεν scarcely or no sooner had misfortune befallen me when.., D.57.65, cf. 43.69, Isoc.4.86.
    2 οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε, with part. [tense] pres., express a strong exhortation or urgent command, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε τὴν ταχίστην ὀπίσω ἀπαλλασσόμενοι you could not be too quick in departing, i.e. make haste and be off, Hdt.7.162; οὐ φθάνοιτ' ἔτ' ἄν θνῄσκοντες make haste and die, E.Or. 936, cf. 941, Alc. 662, Heracl. 721, Tr. 456 (troch.), IT 245;

    οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτον τοῦτο πράττοντε Ar.Pl. 485

    ; ἀποτρέχων οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ib. 1133; εἰς ἀγορὰν ἰὼν ταχέως οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ib. 874, cf. Ec. 118;

    οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων Pl. Smp. 185e

    , X.Mem.2.3.11; these phrases are not to be treated as questions, cf. οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιμι (sc. λέγων) Pl.Smp. 214e, cf. Phd. 100c, D.25.40, Luc.Fug.26, Symp.2, Anach.14: c. part. [tense] aor., once in Luc., Vit.Auct.26.
    b in 1, 2, or 3 pers., to express immediate futurity, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις ἀκούων you shall hear in a moment, Pl.Euthd. 272d; οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι τὸ πλῆθος τούτοις τοῖς θηρίοις δουλεῦον will soon (or inevitably) be enslaved to.., D.24.143; also to express what is logically inevitable, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιεν αὐτοὺς προσκυνοῦντες they will soon be (or cannot logically help) worshipping them, Aristeas 137;

    τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλεῖ πρὸ αὐτοῦ ἐγκαλῶν Luc.Fug.2

    ;

    οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι κἀμὲ μάντιν λέγων Id.Hes.8

    ;

    οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι τις ἁπάσας ἀναιρῶν τὰς τοιαύτας προστασίας Id.Apol.11

    : c. part. [tense] aor., Id.Tox.2.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φθάνω

  • 19 κόσμος

    κόσμος, ου, ὁ (Hom.+)
    ① that which serves to beautify through decoration, adornment, adorning (Hom.+; Diod S 20, 4, 5 τῶν γυναικῶν τὸν κόσμον; OGI 531, 13; SIG 850, 10; IMaronIsis 41; PEleph 1, 4; PSI 240, 12 γυναικεῖον κόσμον; LXX; TestJud 12:1; JosAs 2:6 al.; Philo, Migr. Abr. 97 γυναικῶν κ.; Jos., Ant. 1, 250; 15, 5; Just., A II, 11, 4f) of women’s attire, etc. ὁ ἔξωθεν … κόσμος external adorning 1 Pt 3:3 (Vi. Hom. 4 of the inward adornment of a woman, beside σωφροσύνη; Crates, Ep. 9; Pythag., Ep. 11, 1; Plut., Mor. 141e; on the topic of external adornment cp. SIG 736, 15–26).
    ② condition of orderliness, orderly arrangement, order (Hom. et al.; s. HDiller, Die vorphilosophische Gebrauch von κ. und κοσμεῖν: BSnell Festschr., ’56, 47–60) μετὰ κόσμου in order Dg 12:9 (text uncertain; s. μετακόσμιος).
    ③ the sum total of everything here and now, the world, the (orderly) universe, in philosophical usage (so, acc. to Plut., Mor. 886b, as early as Pythagoras; certainly Heraclitus, Fgm. 66; Pla., Gorg. 508a, Phdr. 246c; Chrysipp., Fgm. 527 v. Arnim κόσμος σύστημα ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς καὶ τῶν ἐν τούτοις περιεχομένων φύσεων. Likew. Posidonius in Diog. L. 7, 138; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2 p. 391b, 9ff; 2 and 4 Macc; Wsd; EpArist 254; Philo, Aet. M. 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 21; Test12Patr; SibOr 7, 123; AssMos Fgm. b Denis [=Tromp p. 272]; Just., A I, 20, 2 al.; Ath. 19, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68, 14; Did., Gen. 36, 7; 137, 13.—The other philosoph. usage, in which κ. denotes the heaven in contrast to the earth, is prob. without mng. for our lit. [unless perh. Phil 2:15 κ.=‘sky’?]). ἡ ἀέναος τοῦ κ. σύστασις the everlasting constitution of the universe 1 Cl 60:1 (cp. OGI 56, 48 εἰς τὸν ἀέναον κ.). Sustained by four elements Hv 3, 13, 3. πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κ. εἶναι before the world existed J 17:5. ἀπὸ καταβολῆς [κόσμου] from the beginning of the world Mt 13:35; 25:34; Lk 11:50; Hb 4:3; 9:26; Rv 13:8; 17:8. Also ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς κ. Mt 24:21 or ἀπὸ κτίσεως κ. Ro 1:20.—B 5:5 ἀπὸ καταβ. κ. evidently means at the foundation of the world (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.). πρὸ καταβολῆς κ. before the foundation of the world J 17:24; Eph 1:4; 1 Pt 1:20 (on the uses w. καταβολή s. that word, 1). οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κ. no idol has any real existence in the universe (Twentieth Century NT) 1 Cor 8:4. Of the creation in its entirety 3:22. ὁ κόσμος ὅλος = πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις (Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13; TestSol 5:7; TestJob 33:4) Hs 9, 2, 1; 9, 14, 5. φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ stars in the universe Phil 2:15 (s. above). Esp. of the universe as created by God (Epict 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν, τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Wsd 9:9; 2 Macc 7:23 ὁ τοῦ κ. κτίστης; 4 Macc 5:25; Just., A I, 59, 1 al.; Ath. 8, 2 al.) ὁ ποιήσας τὸν κ. who has made the world Ac 17:24. ὁ κτίστης τοῦ σύμπαντος κ. 1 Cl 19:2; ὁ κτίσας τὸν κ. Hv 1, 3, 4; cp. m 12, 4, 2. ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κ. κυριεύων B 21:5. οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15. Christ is called παντὸς τοῦ κ. κύριος 5:5; and the κ. owes its origin to his agency J 1:10b. The world was created for the sake of the church Hv 2, 4, 1.—The universe, as the greatest space conceivable, is not able to contain someth. (Philo, Ebr. 32) J 21:25.
    ④ the sum total of all beings above the level of the animals, the world, as θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν (i.e. οἱ ἀπόστολοι) τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 Cor 4:9. Here the world is divided into angels and humans (cp. the Stoic definition of the κόσμος in Stob., Ecl. I p. 184, 8 τὸ ἐκ θεῶν καὶ ἀνθρώπων σύστημα; likew. Epict 1, 9, 4.—Acc. to Ocellus Luc. 37, end, the κ. consists of the sphere of the divine beyond the moon and the sphere of the earthly on this side of the moon).
    ⑤ planet earth as a place of inhabitation, the world (SIG 814, 31 [67 A.D.] Nero, ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου κύριος; the meaning of the birthday of Augustus for the world OGI 458, 40 [=IPriene 105]; 2 Macc 3:12; Jos., Ant. 9, 241; 10, 205; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68)
    ⓐ gener. Mk 16:15. τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ κ. Mt 4:8; ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 26:13. Cp. 13:38 (cp. Hs 5, 5, 2); Mk 14:9; Hs 9, 25, 2. τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. τούτου the light of this world (the sun) J 11:9. In rhetorical exaggeration ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τ. κόσμῳ Ro 1:8 (cp. the Egypt. grave ins APF 5, 1913, 169 no. 24, 8 ὧν ἡ σωφροσύνη κατὰ τὸν κ. λελάληται). Abraham as κληρονόμος κόσμου heir of the world 4:13.—Cp. 1 Cor 14:10; Col 1:6. ἡ ἐν τῷ κ. ἀδελφότης the brotherhood in the (whole) world 1 Pt 5:9. ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν our Lord has assumed the sovereignty of the world Rv 11:15. τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κ. (not LXX, but prob. rabbinic אֻמּוֹת הָעוֹלָם=humankind apart fr. Israel; Billerb. II 191; Dalman, Worte 144f) the unconverted in the world Lk 12:30. In this line of development, κόσμος alone serves to designate the polytheistic unconverted world Ro 11:12, 15.—Other worlds (lands) beyond the ocean 1 Cl 20:8.—Many of these pass. bear the connotation of
    ⓑ the world as the habitation of humanity (as SibOr 1, 160). So also Hs 9, 17, 1f. εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. of entrance into the world by being born 1 Cl 38:3. ἐκ τοῦ κ. ἐξελθεῖν leave this present world (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 5 ἔξω τ. κόσμου φεύγειν; s. ἐξέρχομαι 5; cp. Hippol., Ref. 5, 16, 7) 1 Cor 5:10b; 2 Cl 8:3. γεννηθῆναι εἰς τὸν κ. be born into the world J 16:21. ἕως ἐσμὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κ. 2 Cl 8:2. οὐδὲν εἰσφέρειν εἰς τὸν κ. (Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 294 τὸν μηδὲν εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσενηνοχότα) 1 Ti 6:7 (Pol 4:1). πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὸν κ. 2J 7.—ἐν τῷ κόσμω τούτῳ J 12:25 (κ. need not here be understood as an entity hostile to God, but the transition to the nuance in 7b, below, is signalled by the term that follows: ζωὴν αἰώνιον). ἵνα εἰς κόσμον προέλθῃ AcPlCor 2:6.
    ⓒ earth, world in contrast to heaven (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 59; Iren., 1, 4, 2 [Harv. I 35, 5]; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 15, 24) ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ 2 Cl 19:3.—Esp. when mention is made of the preexistent Christ, who came fr. another world into the κόσμος. So, above all, in John (Bultmann, index I κόσμος) ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. (τοῦτον) J 6:14; 9:39; 11:27; 16:28a; 18:37; specif. also come into the world as light 12:46; cp. 1:9; 3:19. Sending of Jesus into the world 3:17a; 10:36; 17:18; 1J 4:9. His εἶναι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ J 1:10a; 9:5a; 17:12 v.l. Leaving the world and returning to the Father 13:1a; 16:28b. Cp. 14:19; 17:11a. His kingship is not ἐκ τοῦ κ. τούτου of this world i.e. not derived from the world or conditioned by its terms and evaluations 18:36ab.—Also Χρ. Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τ. κόσμον 1 Ti 1:15; cp. ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ (opp. ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ) 3:16.—εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κ. Hb 10:5.
    ⓓ the world outside in contrast to one’s home PtK 3 p. 15, 13; 19.
    ⑥ humanity in general, the world (TestAbr B 8 p. 113, 11 [Stone p. 74]; ApcEsdr 3:6 p. 27, 14; SibOr 1, 189; Just., A I, 39, 3 al.)
    ⓐ gener. οὐαὶ τῷ κ. ἀπὸ τῶν σκανδάλων woe to humankind because of the things that cause people to sin Mt 18:7; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. the light for humanity 5:14; cp. J 8:12; 9:5. ὁ σωτὴρ τοῦ κ. 4:42; 1J 4:14 (this designation is found in inscriptions, esp. oft. of Hadrian [WWeber, Untersuchungen z. Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus 1907, 225; 226; 229]).—J 1:29; 3:17b; 17:6.—κρίνειν τὸν κ. (SibOr 4, 184; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 11 [Stone p. 32]; ApcMos 37) of God, Christ J 12:47a; Ro 3:6; B 4:12; cp. Ro 3:19. Of believers 1 Cor 6:2ab (cp. Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13 the souls of the virtuous, together w. the gods, will rule the whole κόσμος). Of Noah διʼ ἧς (sc. πίστεως) κατέκρινεν τὸν κ. Hb 11:7. ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κ. εἰσῆλθεν Ro 5:12; likew. θάνατος εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν κ. 1 Cl 3:4 (Wsd 2:24; 14:14). Cp. Ro 5:13; 1 Cor 1:27f. περικαθάρματα τοῦ κ. the refuse of humanity 4:13. Of persons before conversion ἄθεοι ἐν τῷ κ. Eph 2:12.—2 Cor 1:12; 5:19; Js 2:5; 1J 2:2; 4:1, 3. ἀρχαῖος κόσμος the people of the ancient world 2 Pt 2:5a; cp. vs. 5b; 3:6. Of pers. of exceptional merit: ὧν οὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κ. of whom the world was not worthy Hb 11:38.—ὅλος ὁ κ. all the world, everybody Ac 2:47 D; 1 Cl 5:7; cp. ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 59:2; εἰς ὅλον τὸν κ. Hs 8, 3, 2. Likew. ὁ κόσμος (cp. Philo, De Prov. in Eus., PE 8, 14, 58) ὁ κ. ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν J 12:19. ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κ. 8:26; ἐν τῷ κ. 17:13; ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κ. 18:20; cp. 7:4; 14:22. ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κ. 14:31; cp. 17:23; ἵνα ὁ κ. πιστεύῃ 17:21.
    ⓑ of all humanity, but especially of believers, as the object of God’s love J 3:16, 17c; 6:33, 51; 12:47b.
    ⑦ the system of human existence in its many aspects, the world
    ⓐ as scene of earthly joys, possessions, cares, sufferings (cp. 4 Macc 8:23) τὸν κ. ὅλον κερδῆσαι gain the whole world Mt 16:26; Mk 8:36; Lk 9:25; 2 Cl 6:2 (cp. Procop. Soph., Ep. 137 the whole οἰκουμένη is an unimportant possession compared to ἀρετή). τὰ τερπνὰ τοῦ κ. the delightful things in the world IRo 6:1. οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κ. ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι those who use the world as though they had no use of it or those who deal with the world as having made no deals with it 1 Cor 7:31a. ἔχειν τὸν βίον τοῦ κ. possess worldly goods 1J 3:17. τὰ τοῦ κόσμου the affairs of the world 1 Cor 7:33f; cp. 1J 2:15f. The latter pass. forms an easy transition to the large number of exprs. (esp. in Paul and John) in which
    ⓑ the world, and everything that belongs to it, appears as that which is hostile to God, i.e. lost in sin, wholly at odds w. anything divine, ruined and depraved (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 [the κόσμος is τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς κακίας]; 13, 1 [ἡ τοῦ κ. ἀπάτη], in Stob. p. 428, 24 Sc.; En 48:7; TestIss 4:6; AscIs 3:25; Hdb., exc. on J 1:10; Bultmann ad loc.—cp. Sotades Maronita [III B.C.] 11 Diehl: the κόσμος is unjust and hostile to great men) IMg 5:2; IRo 2:2. ὁ κόσμος οὗτος this world (in contrast to the heavenly realm) J 8:23; 12:25, 31a; 13:1; 16:11; 18:36; 1J 4:17; 1 Cor 3:19; 5:10a; 7:31b; Hv 4, 3, 2ff; D 10:6; 2 Cl 5:1, 5; (opp. ὁ ἅγιος αἰών) B 10:11. ‘This world’ is ruled by the ἄρχων τοῦ κ. τούτου the prince of this world, the devil J 12:31b; 16:11; without τούτου 14:30. Cp. ὁ κ. ὅλος ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται the whole world lies in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19; cp. 4:4; also ὁ αἰὼν τοῦ κ. τούτου Eph 2:2 (s. αἰών 4).—Christians must have nothing to do with this world of sin and separation fr. God: instead of desiring it IRo 7:1, one is to ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. keep oneself untainted by the world Js 1:27. ἀποφεύγειν τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κ. 2 Pt 2:20; cp. 1:4 (s. ἀποφεύγω 1).—Pol 5:3. ἡ φιλία τοῦ κ. ἔχθρα τ. θεοῦ ἐστιν Js 4:4a; cp. vs. 4b. When such an attitude is taken Christians are naturally hated by the world IRo 3:3; J 15:18, 19ad; 17:14a; 1J 3:13, as their Lord was hated J 7:7; 15:18; cp. 1:10c; 14:17; 16:20.—Also in Paul: God and world in opposition τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κ. and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ the spirit of the world and the spirit that comes fr. God 1 Cor 2:12; σοφία τοῦ κ. and σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 1:20f. ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη and ἡ τοῦ κ. λύπη godly grief and worldly grief 2 Cor 7:10. The world is condemned by God 1 Cor 11:32; yet also the object of the divine plan of salvation 2 Cor 5:19; cp. 1 Cl 7:4; 9:4. A Christian is dead as far as this world is concerned: διʼ οὗ (i.e. Ἰ. Χρ.) ἐμοὶ κ. ἐσταύρωται κἀγὼ κόσμῳ through Christ the world has been crucified for me, and I have been (crucified) to the world Gal 6:14; cp. the question τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κ. δογματίζεσθε; Col 2:20b. For στοιχεῖα τοῦ κ. Gal 4:3; Col 2:8, 20a s. στοιχεῖον.—The use of κ. in this sense is even further developed in John. The κ. stands in opposition to God 1J 2:15f and hence is incapable of knowing God J 17:25; cp. 1J 4:5, and excluded fr. Christ’s intercession J 17:9; its views refuted by the Paraclete 16:8. Neither Christ himself 17:14c, 16b; 14:27, nor his own 15:19b; 17:14b, 16a; 1J 3:1 belong in any way to the ‘world’. Rather Christ has chosen them ‘out of the world’ J 15:19c, even though for the present they must still live ‘in the world’ 17:11b; cp. 13:1b; 17:15, 18b. All the trouble that they must undergo because of this, 16:33a, means nothing compared w. the victorious conviction that Christ (and the believers w. him) has overcome ‘the world’ vs. 33b; 1J 5:4f, and that it is doomed to pass away 2:17 (TestJob 33:4; Kephal. I 154, 21: the κόσμος τῆς σαρκός will pass away).
    ⑧ collective aspect of an entity, totality, sum total (SIG 850, 10 τὸν κόσμον τῶν ἔργων (but s. 1 above); Pr 17:6a) ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας ἡ γλῶσσα καθίσταται the tongue becomes (or proves to be) the sum total of iniquity Js 3:6 (so, approx., Meinertz; FHauck.—MDibelius, Windisch and ASchlatter find mng. 7b here, whereas ACarr, Exp. 7th ser., 8, 1909, 318ff thinks of mng. 1). Χρ. τὸν ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου τῶν σῳζομένων σωτηρίας παθόντα Christ, who suffered or died (s. πάσχω 3aα) for the salvation of the sum total of those who are saved MPol 17:2.—FBytomski, D. genet. Entwicklung des Begriffes κόσμος in d. Hl. Schrift: Jahrb. für Philos. und spekul. Theol. 25, 1911, 180–201; 389–413 (only the OT); CSchneider, Pls u. d. Welt: Αγγελος IV ’32, 11–47; EvSchrenck, Der Kosmos-Begriff bei Joh.: Mitteilungen u. Nachrichten f. d. evang. Kirche in Russland 51, 1895, 1–29; RLöwe, Kosmos u. Aion ’35; RBultmann, D. Verständnis v. Welt u. Mensch im NT u. im Griechentum: ThBl 19, ’40, 1–14; GBornkamm, Christus u. die Welt in der urchr. Botschaft: ZTK 47, ’50, 212–26; ALesky, Kosmos ’63; RVölkl, Christ u. Welt nach dem NT ’61; GJohnston, οἰκουμένη and κ. in the NT: NTS 10, ’64, 352–60; NCassem, ibid. 19, ’72/73, 81–91; RBratcher, BT 31, ’80, 430–34.—B. 13; 440. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κόσμος

  • 20 ὑπάρχω

    ὑπάρχω, [tense] fut.
    A

    - ξω Hdt.6.109

    , S.Ant. 932 (anap.): [tense] aor. ὑπῆρξα (v. infr. 1):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.

    ὑπαρχθήσομαι PTeb.418.7

     (iii A. D.): [tense] pf. ὕπηργμαι, [dialect] Ion.

    - αργμαι Hdt.7.11

    :—begin, take the initiative:—Constr.:
    1 abs., Od.24.286, E.Ph. 1223;

    ὑπάρχων ἠδίκεις αὐτούς Isoc.16.44

    ; ὁ ὑπάρξας the beginner (in a quarrel), D.59.15, cf. 1;

    ἀμύνεσθαι τοὺς ὑπάρξαντας Lys.24.18

    ;

    ἀμυνομένους, μὴ ὑπάρχοντας Pl.Grg. 456e

    ;

    ὡς οὐχ ὑπάρχων ἀλλὰ τιμωρούμενος Men.358

    :—[voice] Med., Pl.Ti. 41c, Ael. NA12.41, etc.
    2 c. gen., take the initiative in, begin, ἀδίκων ἔργων, ἀδικίης, Hdt.1.5, 4.1, cf. Th.2.74, etc.;

    ὑ. τῆς ἐλευθερίας τῇ Ἑλλάδι And.1.142

    , cf. Pl.Mx. 237b.
    b in [voice] Med. c. inf., Ael.NA14.11: c. gen., βαδίσεως -ονται ib.4.34; ἡλίου -ομένου τῆς ἀκμῆς ib.1.20.
    4 c. acc., ὑ. εὐεργεσίας εἴς τινα or τινι take the initiative in [doing] kindnesses to one, D.19.280, Aeschin.2.26; ὑ. τοῦτο (sc. τὸ εὐνοεῖν) Men.927:—[voice] Pass.,

    ὑπηρεσίαι ὑπηργμέναι εἰς Φίλιππον αὑτῷ Aeschin. 2.109

    ;

    τὰ παρὰ τῶν θεῶν ὑπηργμένα D.1.10

    ; τὰ ἔκ τινος ὑπαργμένα ([dialect] Ion. for ὑπηργ-) Hdt.7.11;

    ὑπηργμένων πολλῶν κἀγαθῶν Ar. Lys. 1159

    ;

    οὐδέν μοι ὑπῆρκτο εἰς αὐτόν Antipho 5.58

    ;

    ἀνάξια τῶν εἰς ὑμᾶς ὑπηργμένων Lys.21.25

    ; ἄξιον τῶν ὑ. equivalent to what was done for him, Arist.EN 1163b21: impers., ὑπῆρκτο αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ Πειραιέως) a beginning of it had been made, Th.1.93.
    B in [voice] Act. only, to be the begining,

    παιδοβόροι μὲν πρῶτον ὑπῆρξαν μόχθοι τάλανες A.Ch. 1068

     (anap.); πολλῶν κακῶν, μεγάλων ἀχέων, E.Ph. 1582 (v. l.), Andr. 274 (lyr.), cf. HF 1169.
    2 to be already in existence,

    πημονῆς δ' ἅλις γ' ὑπάρχει A.Ag. 1656

     (troch.);

    φοίνισσα δὲ Θρηϊκίων ἀγέλα ταύρων ὑπᾶρχεν

     was already there,

    Pi.P.4.205

    ; αὗται αἱ νέες τοῖσι Ἀθηναίοισι ὑπῆρχον already existed, opp. to those they were about to build, Hdt.7.144; εἰ τοίνυν σφι χώρη γε μηδεμία ὑπῆρχε if they had no country originally existing, Id.2.15; χωρὶς δὲ τούτων οἱ χίλιοι ὑπῆρχον the original thousand existed, X.Cyr.1.5.5;

    ἔδει πρῶτον μὲν ὑπάρχειν πάντων ἰσηγορίαν Eup.291

     (lyr.);

    ὑπαρχούσης μὲν τιμῆς, παρούσης δὲ δυνάμεως X.Ages.8.1

    ;

    τοῦτο δεῖ προσεῖναι, τὰ δ' ἄλλ' ὑπάρχει D.3.15

    , cf. 8.53;

    ταὐτὰ ὑ. αὐτῷ ἅπερ ἐμοί Antipho 5.60

    , cf. Lys.12.23; ὑμῖν.. ἐλευθερίαν τε ὑπάρχειν καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων ξυμμάχοις κεκλῆσθαι there is in store for you.., Th.5.9: c. gen., οἶκος δ' ὑ. τῶνδε.. ἔχειν there is store of these things for us to have, A.Ag. 961 (s. v. l., οἴκοις Pors.): freq. in part., ἡ ὑπάρχουσα οὐσία the existing property, Isoc.1.28;

    τὰ ὑ. ἁμαρτήματα Th.2.92

    ; τῆς ὑ. τιμῆς for the current price, Syngr. ap. D.35.12; οἱ ὑ. πολῖται the existing citizens, Id.18.295; τῆς φύσεως ὑ. nature being what it is, X.Cyr.6.4.4; also κρησφύγετόν τι ὑπάρχον εἶναι that there should be a refuge ready prepared, Hdt.5.124.
    4 simply, be,

    τοῖσιν ἄγουσιν κλαύμαθ' ὑπάρξει S.Ant. 932

     (anap.);

    ὅθεν εὐμάρει' ὑπάρχοι πόρου Id.Ph. 704

     (lyr.): and with a predicate,

    θησαυρὸς ἄν σοι παῖς ὑπῆρχ' οὑμός E.Hec. 1229

    ;

    τὸ χωρίον καρτερὸν ὑ. Th.4.4

    ; φύσεως ἀγαθῆς ὑπάρξαι to be of a good natural disposition, X.Oec.21.11;

    κἂν σοφὸς ὑπάρχῃ Philem.102

    ; μέγα ὑ. τοῖς τοιούτοις λόγοις ις of great advantage to them, D.3.19; πολλῶν ὑπάρξει κῦρος ἡμέρα καλῶν, = κυρώσει πολλὰ καλά, S.El. 919.
    b τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, much like τὰ ὑπηργμένα (A. 4 [voice] Pass.), a man's record,

    ἀνάξιον τῶν ὑ. τῇ πόλει καὶ πεπραγμένων τοῖς προγόνοις D.8.49

    ; τὰ κάλλιστα τῶν ὑ. your past record, Id.18.95; ἡ ὑπάρχουσα αἰσχύνη the disgrace which has been incurred, Id.19.217;

    τὰ ὑπάρχοντα [αὑτῷ] ἐγκλήματα Aeschin.1.179

    .
    5 sts. with a part., much like τυγχάνω, τοιαῦτα [αὐτῷ] ὑπῆρχε ἐὀντα Hdt.1.192;

    ἐχθρὸς ὑ. ὤν D.21.38

    ;

    ὑ. δύναμιν κεκτημένοι Id.3.7

    , cf. 15.1.
    6 προγόνων ὑ. τῶν ἐξ Ἰλίου to be the descendant of.., D.H.2.65.
    II like ὑπόκειμαι 11.2, to be laid down, to be taken for granted, Pl.Smp. 198d; τούτου ὑπάρχοντος, τούτων ὑπαρχόντων, this being granted, Id.Ti. 30c, 29b;

    θέντες ὡς ὑπάρχον Id.R. 458a

    .
    III belong to, fall to one, accrue, ὑπάρξει τοι.. τὰ ἐναντία you will have, Hdt.6.109, etc.;

    τὸ μισεῖσθαι πᾶσιν ὑ. Th.2.64

    ; τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀπ' ἀλλήλων ἀμφοτέροις [σωτηρίαν] Id.6.86; ἡ ὑπάρχουσα φύσις your proper nature, its normal condition, Id.2.45; τῇ τέχνῃ ὑπάρχειν διδούς assigning as a property of art, Pl.Phlb. 58c, cf. Tht. 150b, 150c.
    2 of persons, ὑ. τινί to be devoted to one, X.An.1.1.4, HG7.5.5, D.19.54, etc.; καθ' ὑμῶν ὑπάρξων ἐκείνῳ he will be on his side against you, ib.118, cf. 2.14.
    b ἐν παντὶ.. πᾶς χωρίῳ, καὶ ᾧ μὴ ὑπάρχομεν every one in every place, even outside our sphere of influence (lit. to which we do not belong), Th.6.87.
    3 in the Logic of Arist. ὑπάρχειν denotes the subsistence of qualities in a subject, Metaph.1025a14; ὑ. τινί, = κατηγορεῖσθαί τινος, APr. 25a13, al.; ὑ. κατά τινος ib. 24a27, Int. 16b13; ἐπί τινος ib. 16a32;

    ὑ. τινὶ ζῴῳ πεζῷ δίποδι εἶναι Top. 109a14

    ; ὑπάρξει τι [τῷ πρώτῳ] it will have predicates, Plot.5.6.2;

    ἡ γένεσις τῷ χρόνῳ.. ὑπάρχει Dam.Pr. 142

    .
    IV freq. in neut. pl. part., τὰ ὑπάρχοντα,
    1 in signf. 1, existing circumstances, presentadvantages, Democr. 191, D.2.2;

    ἀπὸ τῶν αἰεὶ ὑ. σφαλέντες Th.4.18

    , cf. 6.33; πρὸς τὰ ὑ. ib.31;

    ἐκ τῶν ὑ.

     under the circumstances, according to one's means,

    X. An.6.4.9

    , Arist.Pol. 1288b33;

    ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑ. Th.7.76

    , 8.1.
    2 in signf. 111, possessions, resources, Id.1.70, 144, etc.; τὰ ἑκατέροις ὑ. ib. 141;

    κινδυνεύειν περὶ τῶν ὑ. Isoc.3.57

    : as a Subst.,

    τὰ ὑ. αὐτοῦ Ev.Matt. 24.47

    , cf. LXXGe.12.5; ὑποθέμενος τὰ ὑ. καὶ ὑπάρξοντα present and future resources, POxy.125.22 (vi A.D.), etc.
    3 Math., ὑπάρχοντα εἴδη positive terms, Dioph.1Def.10.
    V impers., ὑπάρχει the fact is that.., c. acc. et inf.,

    ὑ. γάρ σε μὴ γνῶναί τινα S.El. 1340

    ; ὡς ὑ. τοῦ ἔχειν .. as the case stands with regard to having, Arist.HA 516b25; περὶ τοὺς μαστοὺς ὑπεναντίως ὑ. ib. 500a14.
    2 it is allowed, it is possible, c. dat. et inf.,

    ὑ. ἡμῖν ἐπικρατεῖν Th.7.63

    , cf. And.2.19, etc.;

    ὑ. αὐτῇ εὐδαίμονι εἶναι Pl.Phd. 81a

    , cf. Prt. 345a, Phdr. 240b, etc.: also without a dat.,

    οὐχ ὑ. εἰδέναι Th.1.82

    ;

    ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν εἶναι μητέρα Is.7.25

    , etc.: abs., ὥσπερ ὑπῆρχε as well as was possible, Th.3.109.
    3 in neut. part., ὑπάρχον ὑμῖν πολεμεῖν since it is allowed you to.., Th. 1.124, cf. Pl.Smp. 217a.
    C to be ὕπαρχος or subordinate colleague, D.C.36.36;

    τῷ.. Ἀντωνίνῳ Id.71.34

    .
    II dub. in the sense of ἄρχω, rule; for Th.6.87, where the Sch. is in error, v. supr. B.111.2b; in Arist.Pol. 1291b32 ὑπερέχειν is prob. l.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑπάρχω

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Everyone I Have Ever Slept With 1963–1995 — (1995), also known as The Tent ,Brown, p.83.] was an artwork created by Tracey Emin RA (born 3 July, 1963), an English artist of Turkish Cypriot origin and a leading member of the group known as Britartists or YBAs (Young British Artists). The… …   Wikipedia

  • With-profits policy — A with profits policy (Commonwealth) or participating policy (U.S.) is an insurance contract that participates in the profits of a life insurance company. The company is often a mutual life insurance company, or had been one when it began its… …   Wikipedia

  • They Might Be Giants — This article is about the musical group. For their eponymous debut, see They Might Be Giants (album). For the film, see They Might Be Giants (film). They Might Be Giants They Might Be Giants celebrate the start of their 26th year together during… …   Wikipedia

  • Taken at the Flood — There is a Tide redirects here . There is a Tide is also the name of a short story by Larry Niven, set in the Known Space universe .infobox Book | name = Taken at the Flood title orig = translator = image caption = Dust jacket illustration of the …   Wikipedia

  • Taken (band) — Infobox musical artist Name = Taken Img capt = Img size = Landscape = Background = group or band Birth name = Alias = Born = Died = Origin = Orange County, California, U.S. Instrument = Voice type = Genre = Metalcore Post hardcore Hardcore… …   Wikipedia

  • They're a Weird Mob — Infobox Film name = They re a Weird Mob image size = 215px caption = theatrical poster director = Michael Powell producer = Michael Powell writer = Emeric Pressburger (as Richard Imrie) starring = Walter Chiari Chips Rafferty Clare Dunne music =… …   Wikipedia

  • With a bad grace — Grace Grace (gr[=a]s), n. [F. gr[^a]ce, L. gratia, from gratus beloved, dear, agreeable; perh. akin to Gr. ? to rejoice, cha ris favor, grace, Skr. hary to desire, and E. yearn. Cf. {Grateful}, {Gratis}.] 1. The exercise of love, kindness, mercy …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • With a good grace — Grace Grace (gr[=a]s), n. [F. gr[^a]ce, L. gratia, from gratus beloved, dear, agreeable; perh. akin to Gr. ? to rejoice, cha ris favor, grace, Skr. hary to desire, and E. yearn. Cf. {Grateful}, {Gratis}.] 1. The exercise of love, kindness, mercy …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • They Hunger — is a single player horror based mod of Valve s first person shooter Half Life . It was released by Neil Manke s Black Widow Games in three episodes, the first in 1999, the second in 2000, and the final installment in 2001. All three were at one… …   Wikipedia

  • Have Dreams, Will Travel — (recently changed to West Texas Lullaby) Have Dreams, Will Travel movie poster Directed by Brad Isaacs …   Wikipedia

  • A Room with a View — This article is about the E. M Forster novel. For other uses, see Room with a View (disambiguation). A Room with a View   …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»